2006 Accord

2006 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 55
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 101
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 191
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 237
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 263
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 277
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 281
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Accord Value Package Audio System

０５／０６／０３０９：２４：３５３１ＳＤＡ６３００００１
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Accord Sedan. You may find
STREET descriptions of equipment and features that
are not on your particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
ADDRESS français, veuillez demander à votre
STREET concessionnaire de commander le
numéro de pièce 33SDAC30 .
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２４：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３００００２
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your Honda, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the and birth defects or other
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves reproductive harm.
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique Event Data Recorders
to your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will
be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２４：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３００００３
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２５：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３００００７
Your Vehicle at a Glance
AIRBAGS (P.11, 23)

INDICATORS (P.58)
GAUGES (P.64)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.90) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.114)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROLS
MASTER SWITCH (P.102)
(P.77)
SHIFT LEVER
POWER WINDOW (P.170, 173)
SWITCHES
(P.91)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.82) HANDLE (P.99)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER (P.157)
(P.156)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２５：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００００８
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/ PASSENGER AIRBAG

BRIGHTNESS WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.71) (P.68) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.69)
HAZARD
REMOTE AUDIO WARNING BUTTON
CONTROLS (P.71)
(P.141)
CRUISE CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL (P.145)
SWITCHES＊
MOONROOF
SWITCH REAR WINDOW
(P.94) DEFOGGER
(P.72, 108)
VSA OFF SWITCH STEERING WHEEL HORN

(P.183) ADJUSTMENT
(P.73)
＊ : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２５：３８３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１０
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Additional Information About Your Back Seat .................................. 35
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belts .................................. 20 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt System Components ... 20 Poses Serious Risks................. 35

explains how your airbags work. And Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ........ 21 Children .................................... 37
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 22 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Your Attention ................................... 37
Airbags ...................................... 23 Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Airbag System Components ....... 23 Protecting Infants and
How Your Front Airbags Small Children.......................... 38
Work.......................................... 25 Protecting Infants ........................ 38
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Work.......................................... 30 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
Airbags .......................................... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 With LATCH ................................ 43
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 How the Side Airbag Off With a Belt .................................... 45
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 31 With a Tether ............................... 47
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 48
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14 Indicator Works ....................... 31 Using a Booster Seat ................... 49
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15 Airbag Service .............................. 32 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Front .......................................... 50
Belts ...................................... 16 Protecting Children − General Additional Safety Precautions .... 51
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ................................. 34 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52
Position ................................. 17 All Children Must Be Safety Labels .................................... 53
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Restrained ................................ 34
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２５：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１１
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. can cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page occupants who sit too close to them, the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the or are not properly restrained. risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. Infants, young children, and short occur at lower speeds. Never drive
adults are at the greatest risk. Be faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt sure to follow all instructions and conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in warnings in this manual. maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts, Don’t Drink and Drive Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, one drink can reduce your ability to Having a tire blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers respond to changing conditions, and mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and your reaction time gets worse with hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 16 ). every additional drink. So don’t drink of such problems, check your tire
and drive, and don’t let your friends pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either. and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should maintenance (see page 193 ).
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
can use the belt properly without a
booster (see pages 34 − 51 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２５：５４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１２
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (10) (8) (9) (1) (4) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(2) during a crash.

(7) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(6)
(7) However, you and your passengers
(5) (11) can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(10) Door Locks yourself and your passengers.
(2) (11) Seat Belt Tensioners
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０９０９：１２：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１３
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
includes an indicator on the though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
fasten your seat belts. passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Why Wear Seat Belts injury from an inflating airbag and
Seat belts are the single most allows you to get the best
effective safety device for adults and When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
in child seats.) so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
Not wearing a seat belt properly can reduce your risk of serious
increases the chance of serious Help protect you in almost every injury.
injury or death in a crash, even type of crash, including frontal,
though your vehicle has airbags. side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
In addition, most states and all make sure you wear it properly.
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１４
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle has side airbags to help Your vehicle also has side curtain
restraint system (SRS) with front protect the upper torso of the driver airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and or a front seat passenger during a the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat moderate to severe side impact (see passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to page 28 for more information on how positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page your side airbags work). severe side impact (see page 30 for
25 for more information on how more information on how your side
your front airbags work). curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１５
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：２９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１６
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide chance of someone being thrown out
instructions on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect the driver, adult passengers, helps prevent passengers from

and teenage children who are large accidentally opening a door and
enough and mature enough to drive falling out.
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
See pages 34 − 51 for important an outsider from unexpectedly
guidelines on how to properly opening a door when you come to a
protect infants, small children, and stop.
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. See page 77 for how to lock the
doors, and page 60 for how the door
1.Close and Lock the Doors monitor indicator works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has a door
monitor indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.
CONTINUED
13
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：３７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１７
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure
steering wheel in and out (see page the seat is locked in position.
73 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 85 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：４５３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１８
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 87 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See page 85 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible.
15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２６：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００１９
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：００３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２０
RELEASE
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
BUTTONS lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is

very important that they continue to
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats,
properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways,
an anchor, press and hold the release or puts one or both feet up, the
buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page 20 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts greatly increased.
positions). and how to take care of them.
CONTINUED
17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：０６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２１
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
18
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２２
Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your
same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an
could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured

crash. if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２３
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten The seat belts use the same
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will monitoring system as the front
shoulder belts in all five seating come on about 6 seconds after the airbags. The system may not work
positions. The front seat belts are ignition switch is turned to the ON properly under these conditions:
also equipped with automatic seat (II) position.
belt tensioners. Placing heavy items on the front
If either the driver or a front passenger’s seat.
The seat belt system passenger does not fasten their seat
includes an indicator on the belt while driving, the beeper will The front passenger is not sitting
instrument panel and a beeper to sound and the indicator will flash properly.
remind you and your passengers to again at regular intervals.
fasten your seat belts. The front passenger’s seat-back is
When no one is sitting in the front pressed forward by a folded-down
This system monitors the front seat passenger’s seat, or a small child is rear seat.
belts. If you turn the ignition switch riding there, the indicator will not
to the ON (II) position before your come on and the beeper will not Have your vehicle checked by a
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound. dealer if the indicator comes on or
sound and the indicator will flash. If the beeper sounds when there is no
your seat belt is not fastened before front passenger or objects on the
the beeper stops, the indicator will front seat.
stop flashing but remain on.
20
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２４
Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body. Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest, The seat belts in all positions except
and across your hips. the driver’s have an additional

locking mechanism that must be
To fasten the belt, insert the latch activated to secure a child seat (see
plate into the buckle, then tug on the page 45 ).
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 16 for how to If the shoulder part of the belt is
properly position the belt). pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
To unlock the belt, press the red will retract, but it will not allow the
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide passenger to move freely.
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the To deactivate the locking For added protection, the front seat
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the mechanism, unlatch the buckle and belts are equipped with automatic
way and will not get closed in the let the seat belt fully retract. To seat belt tensioners. When activated,
door. refasten the seat belt, pull it out only the tensioners immediately tighten
as far as needed. the belts to help hold the driver and
All seat belts have an emergency a front passenger in place.
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help CONTINUED
21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２５
The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance The dealer should also inspect the
activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the anchors for damage and replace
enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly. them if needed. If the automatic seat
deploy. belt tensioners activate during a
Pull each belt out fully, and look for crash, they must be replaced.
If a side curtain airbag deploys frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a side impact, the tensioner that the latches work smoothly and For information on how to clean your
on that side of the vehicle will also the belts retract easily. If a belt does seat belts, see page 224 .
deploy. not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
The tensioners can also be activated 224 ). Any belt that is not in good
during a collision in which the front condition or working properly will Not checking or maintaining
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the not provide good protection and seat belts can result in serious
airbags would not be needed, but the should be replaced as soon as injury or death if the seat belts
additional restraint could be helpful. possible. do not work properly when
needed.
When the tensioners are activated, Honda provides a lifetime warranty
the seat belts will remain tight until on seat belts for U.S. models. See Check your seat belts regularly
they are unbuckled in the normal your Honda Warranty Information and have any problem
manner. booklet for details. corrected as soon as possible.
If the front seat belt tensioners ever If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
activate, they must be replaced as it must be replaced by the dealer. A
the belts will no longer retract belt that has been worn during a
properly. crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
22
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：４７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２６
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:

(8) (9) (2) Two SRS (supplemental restraint
(1) (11) system) front airbags. The driver’s

(8) airbag is stored in the center of
(5) the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
(1) Driver’s Airbag
Two side curtain airbags, one for
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(10) (4) each side of the vehicle. The
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(7) airbags are stored in the ceiling
(5) Side Airbags (3) above the side windows. The front
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(5) (7) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(8) Front Impact Sensors (10) CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(9) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator (4) 30 ).
(10) Side Impact Sensors (6)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
CONTINUED
23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２７：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２７
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 21 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the
seat. If the weight of an infant or passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a small child is detected, the turned off (see page 31 ).
moderate to severe front impact or passenger’s front airbag will be
side impact. turned off. An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the front
Sensors that can detect whether a A sophisticated electronic system passenger’s side airbag has been
child is in the passenger’s side that continually monitors and turned off (see page 31 ).
airbag path and signal the control records information about the
unit to turn the airbag off (see sensors, the control unit, the Emergency backup power in case
page 27 ). airbag activators, the seat belt your vehicle’s electrical system is
tensioners, and driver and front disconnected in a crash.
A driver’s seat position sensor that passenger seat belt use when the
monitors the distance of the seat ignition is in ON (II).
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will An indicator on the instrument
inflate with less force (see page panel that alerts you to a possible
27 ). problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 30 ).
24
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：０３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２８
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 31 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００２９
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of belt.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
26
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３０
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER’S

properly: SEAT PASSENGER’S
POSITION SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child, the system will
If there is a problem with the sensor, automatically turn the passenger’s
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS Indicator will come on, and front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３１
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
31 ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
If the weight sensors detect that items in the seat-back pocket.
there is no passenger in the front
seat, the airbag will be off. However, Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator the front passenger’s seat is hooked
will not come on. to the floor mat anchor (see page
224 ). If it is not, the mat may
To ensure that the passenger’s interfere with the proper operation
advanced front airbag system will of the sensors and operation of the
work properly, do not do anything seat. If you ever have a moderate to
that would increase or decrease the severe side impact, sensors will
weight on the front passenger’s seat. detect rapid deceleration and signal
This includes: the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
A rear passenger pushing or side airbag.
pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
28
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：３４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３２
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 31 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the height
should wear their seat belts and sit and position sensors in the seat There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. detect a child has leaned into the the moment the passenger moves
side airbag’s deployment path, the into or out of the airbag deployment
airbag will shut off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or other object as a
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：４３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３３
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants When you turn the ignition switch to
should wear their seat belts and sit the ON (II) position, this indicator
upright and well back in their seats. comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
In a moderate to severe side impact, by your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to If the SRS indicator does not come
instantly inflate the side curtain on after you turn the ignition
airbag on the driver’s or the switch to the ON (II) position.
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３４
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada This indicator
need them. alerts you that the

passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does not mean there is a
Ignoring the SRS indicator can problem with your side airbags.
result in serious injury or death U.S. Canada
if the airbag systems or When you turn the ignition switch to
tensioners do not work properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
Have your vehicle checked by a out (see page 59 ). If it doesn’t come
dealer as soon as possible if on, stays on, or comes on while PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
the SRS indicator alerts you to driving without a passenger in the
a possible problem. front seat, have the system checked. This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child on the front passenger’s
seat. It does not mean there is a
problem with the airbag.
CONTINUED
31
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２８：５９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３５
If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
come on. parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
However, if the indicator comes on vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
with no passenger in the front, or
with an adult in the seat, there may An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
be a problem with the advanced that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
airbag system. Have the vehicle replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
checked by the dealer as soon as unit and other related parts. If a should inspect the driver’s seat
possible. front airbag inflates, the seat belt position sensor and the front
tensioners must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors to
The passenger airbag off indicator make sure they are operating
may also come on and off repeatedly Do not try to remove or replace properly.
if total weight on the seat is near the any airbag by yourself. This must
airbag cutoff threshold. be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
32
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３６
Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-

Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

protection. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front

seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
33
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：１１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３７
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 48 − 51 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 38 − 47 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
34
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３８
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Poses Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
age 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system, which
restrained in a back seat. Some can automatically turn the Larger Children
states have laws restricting where passenger’s front airbag off (see Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. page 27 ), please follow the seats are also at risk of being injured
guidelines below. or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in back are less front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt (see page 48 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
in the back. of the child seat with enough force children).
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
CONTINUED
35
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：３５３１ＳＤＡ６３０００３９
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
36
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４０
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front seat belt in crash, you could be

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 48 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 13 ). and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires close physical
Have the child sit upright and well attention or frequent visual Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 16 ). contact, we strongly recommend same seat belt. If they do, they
that another adult ride with the could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly child in a back seat. The back seat crash.
positioned and secured (see page is far safer for a child than the
16 ). front.
37
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４１
Protecting Children − General Guidelines, Protecting Infants and Small Children
Use childproof door locks to Lock all doors and the trunk when Protecting Infants
prevent children from opening the your vehicle is not in use. Children
doors. This can prevent children who play in vehicles can
from accidentally falling out (see accidentally get trapped inside.
page 78 ). Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
Do not leave children alone in a operate the emergency trunk
vehicle. Leaving children without opener and decide if your children
adult supervision is illegal in most should be shown how to use this
states and Canadian provinces, feature (see page 83 ).
and can be very hazardous.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
For example, infants and small transmitters out of the reach of
children left in a vehicle on a hot children. Even very young
day can die from heatstroke. A children learn how to unlock Child Seat Type
child left alone with the key in the vehicle doors, turn on the ignition An infant must be properly
ignition can accidentally set the switch, and open the trunk, which restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring can lead to accidental injury or child seat until the child reaches the
themselves or others. death. seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides

proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
38
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：２９：５９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４２
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement In any of these situations, we
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed strongly recommend that you install
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back the child seat directly behind the
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a front passenger’s seat, move the seat

rear-facing child seat in the front as far forward as needed, and leave it
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat. unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a forward-facing position. If placed a smaller rear-facing child seat.
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant. Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
When properly installed, a rear- serious injury or death during a
facing child seat may prevent the collision.
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as Always place a rear-facing child
recommended, or from locking their seat in the back seat, not the
seat-back in the desired position. front.
It could also interfere with proper

operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
39
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：０７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４３
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small Child Seat Placement
child use the child seat until the child We strongly recommend placing a
reaches the weight or height limit forward-facing child seat in a back
for the seat. seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Child Seat Type
A child who is at least 1 year old, and Even with advanced front airbags,
who fits within the child seat maker’s which can automatically turn the
weight and height limits, should be passenger’s front airbag off (see
restrained in a forward-facing, page 27 ), a back seat is the safest
upright child seat. place for a small child.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
40
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：１６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４４
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the lower anchors and tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two second- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. row seats. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 43 ).
CONTINUED
41
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４５
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position, or positions, secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
42
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４６
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHOR MARKS Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connection as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
43
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４７
TETHER STRAP HOOK

7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Flexible type ANCHOR
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page

have a flexible-type connection as 87 ), then route the tether strap
shown above. through the legs of the head
restraint, making sure the strap is
4. Whatever type you have, follow not twisted.
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit. 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
44
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：４５３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４８
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
45
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３０：５１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００４９
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
46
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：０１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５０
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Tether
TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS ANCHOR ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child 1. After properly securing the child
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 43 ), lift the head seat (see page 45 ), route the
installed in any seating position in restraint, then route the tether tether strap through the head
the back seat, using one of the strap through the head restraint restraint, and over the seat-back.
anchorage points shown above. legs.
2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach 2. Follow steps 2 and 3 from the
Since a tether can provide additional the tether strap hook to the previous column.
security to the lap/shoulder belt anchor, making sure the strap is
installation, we recommend using a not twisted.
tether whenever one is required or 3. Tighten the strap according to the
available. seat maker’s instructions.
47
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５１
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a larger child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
48
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５２
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or
between the child’s neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as safety standards (see page 41 ) and

possible, touching the child’s that you follow the booster seat
thighs? maker’s instructions.
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster seat
seated like this for the whole trip? must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far to the rear as possible,
If you answer yes to all these and be sure the child is wearing the
questions, the child is ready to wear seat belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward- seat until the tops of the ears are
facing child seat should ride in a even with the top of the seat-back. A
back seat and use a booster seat child of this height should be tall
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
properly without the booster. without a booster.
Some states also require children to

use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
49
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：２７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５３
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see page 48 ). If the seat most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause belt does not fit properly, with or
serious injuries to a child who is without the child sitting on a booster Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, seat, the child should not sit in front. against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out near the floor.
of position. Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any be able to follow the rules, including properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
path of a deploying side airbag, the belt properly throughout a ride. Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
50
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５４
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
51
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３１：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５５
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly. you. set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
52
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：１１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５６
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations SUN VISOR

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels

carefully. If a label comes off or
becomes hard to read (except for the
U.S. dashboard label which is
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement. Canadian models
HOOD DASHBOARD
U.S. models U.S. models only
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
RADIATOR
CAP
53
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５８
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Trip Meter .................................... 65 Driver’s Lumbar Support ............ 85
the controls and displays that Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Front Seat Adjustments .............. 86
contribute to the daily operation of Fuel Gauge ................................... 66 Driver’s Seat Manual Height
your vehicle. All the essential Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 66 Adjustment ............................... 86
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Driver’s Seat Power Height
Wheel ............................................ 67 Adjustment ............................... 87

Wipers and Washers ....................... 68 Head Restraints ........................... 87
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 69 Folding Rear Seat ........................ 88
Automatic Lighting Off Mirrors .............................................. 90
Feature .......................................... 70 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ..... 90
Daytime Running Lights................. 70 Power Windows ............................... 91
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71 Power Window Control
Hazard Warning ............................... 71 Operations ................................ 93
Rear Window Defogger .................. 72 Moonroof .......................................... 94
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 73 Parking Brake .................................. 95
Keys and Locks ................................ 74 Sun Visor........................................... 96
Immobilizer System......................... 75 Vanity Mirror ................................... 96
Ignition Switch ................................. 76 Interior Lights .................................. 97
Control Locations ............................ 56 Door Locks ....................................... 77 Ceiling Light ................................. 97
Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Childproof Door Locks ................... 78 Individual Interior Lights............ 97
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 58 Remote Transmitter ........................ 78 Interior Convenience Items ............ 98
Gauges .............................................. 64 Trunk................................................. 82 Beverage Holders ........................ 99
Odometer/Outside Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 83 Accessory Power Sockets........... 99
Temperature Display .............. 64 Seat Heaters ..................................... 84 Console Compartment ................ 99
Odometer ...................................... 64 Seats .................................................. 85 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 100
Outside Temperature Display.... 64 Power Seat Adjustment .............. 85 Glove Box ................................... 100
55
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：２５３１ＳＤＡ６３０００５９
Control Locations
INDICATORS (P.58) CRUISE CONTROLS (P.145)

GAUGES (P.64) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.71)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.94)
AUDIO SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.114)
(P.90)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROLS
MASTER SWITCH
(P.77) (P.102)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.109)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.170, 173)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.82) HANDLE (P.99)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER (P.157) PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(P.156) (P.95)
56
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６０
Instrument Panel
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.60)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.63)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60)
LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR (P.61) INDICATOR (P.63)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.63)
MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.61)

INDICATOR LAMP (P.58) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR (P.59)
DOOR AND TRUNK

OPEN MONITOR (P.60)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P.63)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER LIGHT (P.58)
SUPPLEMENTAL
CHARGING SYSTEM RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58) INDICATOR (P.59)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.62)
LOW OIL PRESSURE PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM SEC URITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.62)
INDICATOR (P.58) INDICATOR (P.59)
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.62) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.59)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
57
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６１
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Low Oil Pressure
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Indicator
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the The engine can be severely damaged
ignition switch is turned to the ON if this indicator flashes or stays on
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. when the engine is running. For
Indicator more information, see page 250 .
This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper Charging System
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash Indicator
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more If this indicator comes on when the
A beeper also sounds if you and your information, see page 20 . engine is running, the battery is not
front passenger have not fastened being charged. For more information,
your seat belts. see page 251 .
If you turn the ignition switch to the Malfunction Indicator

ON (II) position before fastening Lamp
your seat belts, the beeper sounds, See page 251 .
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
58
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３２：５３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６２
Parking Brake and Brake System Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

Indicator System Indicator Side Airbag Off
U.S. Canada This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator
you turn the ignition switch to the This indicator comes on when you
ON (II) position. If it comes on at turn the ignition switch to the ON
any other time, it indicates a (II) position. If it comes on at any

This indicator has two functions: potential problem with your front other time, it indicates that the
airbags. This indicator will also alert passenger’s side airbag has
1. It comes on when you turn the you to a potential problem with your automatically shut off. For more
ignition switch to the ON (II) side airbags, passenger’s side airbag information, see page 31 .
position. It is a reminder to check automatic cutoff system, side curtain
the parking brake. A beeper airbags, automatic seat belt Anti-lock Brake System
sounds if you try to drive with the tensioners, driver’s seat position (ABS) Indicator
parking brake not fully released. sensor, or the front passenger’s This indicator normally comes on for
Driving with the parking brake not weight sensors. For more a few seconds when you turn the
fully released can damage the information, see page 30 . ignition switch to ON (II), and when
brakes and tires. the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If it comes on at any
2. If it remains lit after you fully other time, there is a problem with
release the parking brake while the ABS. If this happens, have your
the engine is running, or if it vehicle checked at a dealer. With
comes on while driving, there this on, your vehicle still has normal
could be a problem with the brake braking ability but no anti-lock
system. For more information, see brakes. For more information, see
page 253 . page 180 .
59
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１６：４３：３７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６３
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Door and Trunk Open Monitor
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to ON (II). For more
position. information, see page 182 .
If it comes on and stays on at any This indicator has three functions:

other time, or if it does not come on The appropriate indicator comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to 1. It comes on as a reminder that you in this monitor if the trunk or either
ON (II), there is a problem with the have turned off the vehicle door is not closed tightly.
VSA system. Take your vehicle to a stability assist (VSA) system.
dealer to have it checked. Without All the indicators in the monitor
VSA, your vehicle still has normal 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see come on for a few seconds when you
driving ability, but will not have VSA page 182 ). turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
traction and stability enhancement.
See page 182 for more information 3. It comes on along with the VSA
on the VSA system. system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
60
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３３：１１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６４
Turn Signal and Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Hazard Warning
Indicators This indicator reminds you that the
The left or right turn signal indicator exterior lights are on. It comes on
blinks when you signal a lane change when the light switch is in either the
or turn. If the indicators do not blink, or position. If you turn the

or if they blink rapidly, it usually ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
means one of the turn signal bulbs is (I) or the LOCK (0) position without
burned out (see pages 221 and 222 ). turning off the light switch, this
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, indicator will remain on. A reminder
since other drivers cannot see that chime will also sound when you open
you are signaling. the driver’s door.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning button, both turn signal This indicator is located in the fuel
indicators blink. All turn signals on gauge. It comes on as a reminder
the outside of the vehicle should that you must refuel soon.
flash.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3 ) of
fuel remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
61
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３３：１８３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６５
Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running High Beam Indicator

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 If this indicator comes on when the This indicator comes on with the
ignition switch is turned to the ON high beam headlights. For more
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (II) position and the parking brake is information, see page 70 .
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit. When the daytime running lights
Have your vehicle checked by your (DRL) are on, this indicator comes
dealer. on with reduced brightness.
This indicator comes on when the

security system is set. See page
144 for more information on the
security system.
62
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０５：１６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６６
Cruise Control Main Maintenance Minder Immobilizer System

Indicator Indicator Indicator
Only on models equipped with Cruise This indicator reminds you that it is This indicator comes on for a few
Control System time to take your vehicle in for seconds when you turn the ignition
This indicator comes on when you scheduled maintenance. The switch to the ON (II) position. It will
turn on the cruise control master maintenance main items and sub go off if you have inserted a

button (see page 145 ). items will be displayed in the properly-coded ignition key. If it is
information display. See page 193 for not a properly-coded key, the
Cruise Control Indicator more information on the indicator will blink and the engine
maintenance minder. will not start (see page 75 ).
Only on models equipped with Cruise
Control System This indicator goes off when your This indicator also blinks several
This indicator comes on when you dealer resets it after completing the times when you turn the ignition
set the cruise control. See page required maintenance service. switch from the ON (II) position to
145 for information on operating the the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
cruise control. (0) position.
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 208 ).
63
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３３：４０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６７
Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER Outside Temperature Display

FUEL GAUGE EX-L and EX-V6
This display shows the outside
TEMPERATURE temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
GAUGE
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the

ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TRIP METER SELECT/RESET KNOB front bumper. Therefore, the
U.S. model shown temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
Odometer/Outside Temperature Odometer surface, engine heat, and the
Display The odometer shows the total exhaust from surrounding traffic.
The odometer and the outside distance your vehicle has been This can cause an incorrect
temperature display use the same driven. It measures miles in U.S. temperature reading when your
display. To switch the display models and kilometers in Canadian speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
between the odometer and the models. It is illegal under U.S.
outside temperature, press the federal law and Canadian provincial The sensor delays the display update
Select/Reset knob. When you turn regulations to disconnect, reset, or until it reaches the correct outside
the ignition switch to ON (II), what alter the odometer with the intent to temperature. This may take several
you last selected is displayed. change the number of miles or minutes.
kilometers indicated.
64
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３３：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６８
Gauges
If the outside temperature is Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

incorrectly displayed, you can adjust This meter shows the number of This shows the temperature of the
it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) engine’s coolant. During normal
cooler. driven since you last reset it. operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
NOTE: The temperature must be There are two trip meters: Trip A the middle of the gauge. In severe

stabilized before doing this and Trip B. Switch between these driving conditions, such as very hot
procedure. displays and the odometer/outside weather or a long period of uphill
temperature display by pressing the driving, the pointer may rise into the
Select the outside temperature Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each upper half of the gauge. If it reaches
display, then press the Select/Reset trip meter works independently, so the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
knob for 10 seconds. The following you can keep track of two different side of the road. Turn to page 248 for
sequences appear, 1 second at a distances. instructions and precautions on
time: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2, checking the engine’s cooling
−1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1). When you turn the ignition switch to system.
ON (II), what you last selected is
When the temperature reaches the displayed.
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new To reset a trip meter, display it, and
outside temperature displayed. then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
65
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０５：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００６９
Gauges
Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Indicator Maintenance Minder Display

This shows how much fuel you have. (odometer/outside temperature The information display in the
It may show slightly more or less message) instrument panel shows you the
than the actual amount. The needle If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a engine oil life and maintenance
returns to the bottom after you turn ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message will service items when the ignition
off the ignition. appear in the odometer/outside switch is in the ON (II) position. This
temperature display. As soon as it is information helps to keep you aware
safely possible, turn the engine off of the periodic maintenance your
and check that the fuel cap is vehicle needs for continued trouble-
Avoid driving with an extremely low installed. If it is, loosen the cap and free driving. Refer to page 193 for
f uel level. Running out of f uel could tighten it 1 click. Although you can more information.
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging use the Select/Reset button to cycle
the catalytic converter. the fuel cap warning off of the
display, it will be displayed again
each time the engine is started. It
will take several days of normal
driving for the vehicle to turn the
warning off.
If the vehicle on board diagnostic

system continues to detect a
problem, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. If the
MIL does not go off, have your
dealer inspect the vehicle. For more
information, see page 251 .
66
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：０１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７０
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

BRIGHTNESS WIPERS/WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.71) (P.68) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/

TURN SIGNALS
(P.69)
HAZARD
REMOTE AUDIO WARNING BUTTON
CONTROLS (P.71)
(P.141)
CRUISE CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL (P.145)
SWITCHES＊
MOONROOF REAR WINDOW

SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.72, 108)
(P.94)
VSA OFF SWITCH STEERING WHEEL HORN

(P.181) ADJUSTMENT
(P.73)
＊ : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
67
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７１
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
OFF − The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT − The length of the wiper low speed, then complete one more
interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever.
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Except U.S. VP
Vary the delay by turning the INT
1. MIST TIME ring. If you turn it to the
2. OFF shortest delay, the wipers will
3. INT − Intermittent change to low speed operation when
4. LO − Low speed the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
5. HI − High speed (20 km/h).
6. Windshield washers
68
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：１６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７２
Turn Signal, Headlights
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal − Push down on the High Beams − To turn on the high
left lever to signal a left turn and up beams, push the lever forward until
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane you hear a click. The blue high beam
change, push lightly on the lever in indicator will come on (see page 62 ).
the proper direction and hold it. The To turn off the high beams, pull the
lever will return to center when you lever back. To flash the high beams,

release it or complete a turn. pull the lever farther back, and then
release it. The high beams remain on
Headlights − Turning the switch until the lever is released.
on the left lever to the position
turns on the parking lights, taillights,
side marker lights, rear license plate
lights and lights-on indicator.
Turning the switch to the
1. Turn signal position turns on the
2. Off headlights. If you leave the lights on
3. Parking and interior lights with the ignition switch in
4. Headlight on ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), you
5. High beams will hear a reminder chime when you
6. Flash high beams open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of

these positions, the lights-on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
69
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：２３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７３
Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you remove the key from the Daytime Running Lights
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G ignition switch with the headlight With the headlight switch off, the
This feature turns off the headlights, switch on, but do not open the door high beam headlights and the high
parking lights, side marker lights, and get out, the lights will turn off beam indicator come on with
taillights, and rear license plate lights after 10 minutes. reduced brightness when you turn
within 15 seconds of removing the the ignition switch to the ON (II)
key from the ignition switch and The lights will turn on again when position and release the parking
closing the driver’s door. you unlock or open the driver’s door. brake. They remain on until you turn
If you unlock the door, but do not the ignition switch off, even if you
This feature activates if you leave open it within 15 seconds, the lights set the parking brake.
the headlight switch in the or will go off. With the driver’s door
position, remove the key, then open, you will hear a lights-on The headlights revert to normal
open and close the driver’s door. reminder chime. operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
70
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：３１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７４
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning
Instrument Panel Brightness brightness when you turn the Hazard Warning
ignition switch to ON (II).
If you do not insert the key in the

ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns

off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn

the ignition switch to ON (II), the
illumination turns off in about 10
SELECT/RESET KNOB seconds. U.S. model shown
The Select/Reset knob on the To reduce glare at night, the instru- Push the button between the center
instrument panel controls the ment panel illumination dims when vents to turn on the hazard warning
brightness of the instrument panel you turn the light switch to or lights (four-way flashers). This
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the . Turning the Select/Reset causes all four outside turn signals
brightness. knob fully to the right until you hear and both turn indicators in the
a click will cancel the reduced bright- instrument panel to flash. Use the
The instrument panel will illuminate ness. hazard warning lights if you need to
with reduced brightness when you park in a dangerous area near heavy
unlock and open the driver’s door. traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignition switch, then go to normal
71
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：１８：５０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７５
Rear Window Defogger
Manual A/C type shown Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation system
The rear window defogger will clear Make sure the rear window is clear The defogger and antenna wires on
fog, frost, and thin ice from the and you have good visibility before the inside of the rear window can be
window. Push the defogger button to starting to drive. accidentally damaged. When
turn it on and off. The indicator cleaning the glass, always wipe side
above/in the button comes on to to side.
show the defogger is on. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
72
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７６
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 1. Insert the key in the ignition
before you start driving. switch, and unlock the steering
column.
2. Push the lever under the steering

Adjusting the steering wheel column all the way down.

position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
3. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicator lights.
73
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：５０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７７
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
4. Push the lever up to lock the Keys and Locks You should have received a key
steering wheel in that position. number tag with your keys. You will
MASTER VALET KEY
need this key number if you ever
KEY
5. Make sure you have securely NUMBER KEY WITH (LIGHT GREY) have to get a lost key replaced. Use
locked the steering wheel in place TAG REMOTE only Honda-approved key blanks.
by trying to move it up, down, in, TRANSMITTER
and out. These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
The master key fits all the locks on high humidity.
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door Do not drop the keys or set heavy
locks. You can keep the trunk objects on them.
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when Keep the keys away from liquids.
you leave your vehicle and the valet If they get wet, dry them
key at a parking facility. immediately with a soft cloth.
74
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３４：５７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７８
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not following two conditions: (1) This device
start. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any

When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle undriveable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for operation.
a few seconds, then go out. If the If you lose your key and you cannot
indicator starts to blink, it means the start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the approved by the party responsible for
coding of the key. Turn the ignition compliance could void the user’s
switch to the LOCK (0) position, authority to operate the equipment.
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II) This device complies with Industry
position again. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
The system may not recognize your conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key’s coding if another immobilizer interference, and (2) this device must
key or other metal object (i.e. key accept any interference that may cause
fob) is near the ignition switch when undesired operation of the device.
you insert the key.
75
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：０３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００７９
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ACCESSORY (I) − You can

remove the key only in this position. operate the audio system and the
To turn the key, the shift lever must accessory power sockets in this
be in Park, and you must push the position.
key in slightly. If the front wheels
are turned, the anti-theft lock may ON (II) − This is the normal key
make it difficult to turn the key. position when driving. Several of the
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the lights on the instrument panel come
left or to the right as you turn the on as a test when you turn the
key. ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).
START (III) − Use this position

The ignition switch has four only to start the engine. The switch
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY returns to the ON (II) position when
(I), ON (II), START (III). you let go of the key.
76
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８０
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
You will hear a reminder beeper if Door Locks Each door has a lock tab on it. Push
you leave the key in the ignition down the tab to lock the door and
switch in the LOCK (0) or POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH pull it up to unlock. When you push
ACCESSORY (I) position and open top down the tab on the driver’s door, all
the driver’s door. Remove the key to the doors lock.
turn off the beeper.

bottom
To lock any passenger’s door when
If your vehicle has an automatic getting out of the vehicle, push the
transmission, the shift lever must be lock tab down, and close the door.
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch. All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the key in the
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
Removing the key from the Each front door has a power door clockwise, and release it. The
ignition switch while driving lock master switch. Either switch remaining doors unlock when you
locks the steering. This can locks and unlocks all doors. Push the turn the key a second time within a
cause you to lose control of the top of the switch to lock all doors; few seconds.
vehicle. push the bottom to unlock them.
Remove the key from the

ignition switch only when
parked.
77
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：１８３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８１
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter

With the driver’s door open and the
LEVER PANIC UNLOCK
key in the ignition, both door lock
BUTTON BUTTON
switches are disabled. They are not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors.
TRUNK LOCK
RELEASE BUTTON
BUTTON
The childproof door locks are LOCK − Press this button once to
designed to prevent children seated lock all doors. Some exterior and
in the rear from accidentally opening interior lights will flash. The doors
the rear doors. Each rear door has a do not lock if they are not fully
lock lever near the edge. With the closed or the key is in the ignition
lever in the LOCK position, the door switch.
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
78
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８２
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 You cannot lock the doors with the PANIC − Press this button for
Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 remote transmitter if they are not about 1 second to attract attention;
When you push LOCK twice within 5 fully closed or the key is in the the horn will sound and the exterior
seconds, you will hear a beep to ignition switch. lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
verify that the security system is To cancel panic mode, press any
active. If you unlock the doors with the other button on the remote

remote transmitter, but do not open transmitter, or turn the ignition
UNLOCK − Press this button once any of the doors within 30 seconds, switch to the ON (II) position.
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it the doors automatically relock.
twice to unlock the other doors. TRUNK − Press this button for
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 about 1 second to open the trunk.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 You cannot open the trunk if the key
switch is in the center position) will After the doors automatically relock, is in the ignition switch.
come on when you press the the security system will be active.
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any door, the light stays on for about
30 seconds, then fades out. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
79
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８３
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Avoid dropping or throwing the If it takes several pushes on the
transmitter. button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
Protect the transmitter from possible.
extreme temperature.
Battery type: CR1616
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the SCREW

replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of

the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying

its middle seam with your
fingernail.
80
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：４０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８４
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the As required by the FCC:

back of the inner cover, and note This device complies with Part 15 of the
the polarity. Make sure the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
polarity of the new battery is the following two conditions: (1) This device
BATTERY same (＋ side facing down), then may not cause harmful interference, and
insert it into the back of the cover. (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
5. Install the parts in reverse order. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

TAB approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
3. Inside the transmitter, separate authority to operate the equipment.
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the This device complies with Industry
cover. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
81
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０５：３７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８５
Trunk
To close the trunk, press down on

Pull the trunk lid.
See page 165 for cargo loading and

weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 52 .
MASTER
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER KEY
You can open the trunk in either of To protect items in the trunk when
the following ways: you need to give the key to someone
else:
Pull up on the trunk release lever
located to the left of the driver’s 1. Lock the trunk release lever with
seat. the master key. Also make sure
Press and hold the trunk release the trunk pass-through cover is
button on the remote transmitter. locked (see page 89 ).
2. Give the person the valet key.
82
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：５３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８６
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener To open the trunk, push the release

lever to the left.
For more information about child

safety, see page 38 .

As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
83
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３５：５９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８７
Seat Heaters
After the seat reaches a comfortable Follow these precautions whenever

temperature, select LO by pushing you use the seat heaters:
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm. Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
In HI, the heater turns off when the large amounts of current from the
seat gets warm, and turns back on battery.
after the seat temperature drops.
If the engine is left idling for an
In LO, the heater runs continuously. extended period, do not use the
It does not cycle with temperature seat heaters even on the LO
changes. setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters.
84
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８８
Seats
Power Seat Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6
Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and LX-V6 Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You Moves the seat
can adjust the power seat with the forward and backward.
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving. Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
U.S. EX-V6 the rear of the seat up
Canadian EX-V6 or down. To change the lumbar support, move
The passenger’s seat has two the lever on the right side of the
switches. One moves the seat Raises or lowers the seat-back forward or backward.
forward and backward, and the other seat. Keep moving the lever forward or
raises and lowers the seat. backward until you find a suitable
position.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
85
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３０００８９
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Manual Height

Adjustment
U.S. VP and SE
Canadian DX-G and SE
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position, and The height of your driver’s seat is
release the bar. Try to move the seat adjustable. To raise the seat bottom,
to make sure it is locked in position. repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
86
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９０
Seats
Driver’s Seat Power Height Head Restraints They are most effective when you
Adjustment adjust them so the back of the
U.S. EX occupant’s head rests against the
Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 center of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraints

adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
and push the restraint down.
RELEASE BUTTON
See page 15 for important safety

information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
The height of your driver’s seat is
power adjustable. Pull up on the Your vehicle is equipped with head
switch to raise the seat. Push it down restraints in all seating positions to
to lower the seat. help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
Make all adjustments before you injuries.
start driving.
87
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９１
Seats
Folding Rear Seat

MASTER KEY
Pull
GUIDE
The back of the rear seat folds down, When storing cargo, you can move To release the seat-back from inside
giving you direct access to the trunk. the rear center shoulder belt out of the trunk, pull the release loop under
The seat-back can be released from the way by removing the belt from the trunk panel.
inside the vehicle or inside the trunk. the guide.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
To fold down the seat-back from firmly against the trunk panel. Make
inside the vehicle, insert the master sure it is latched in place by pulling
key in the lock on the rear shelf. on the top of the seat.
Turn the key clockwise, pull down
the top of the seat-back, then release
the key.
88
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９２
Seats
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are Trunk Pass-through Cover For security, this cover can be
positioned in front of the rear seat- locked and unlocked only with the
back whenever the seat-back is in its KEY CYLINDER KNOB master key. To lock the cover, insert
upright position. the key and turn it clockwise.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or Never drive with this cover open and

items extending through the opening the trunk lid open.
into the back seat, are secured. See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
Loose items can fly forward and page 52 .
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
164 .
LID
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open. Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on The trunk pass-through cover can be
page 52 . opened from either side; it folds
forward onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pushing or pulling on
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
through are secured.
89
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９３
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob

Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
4. When you finish, turn the

adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
TAB adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility. ADJUSTMENT KNOB
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
The outside mirrors are manually
adjustable. 2. Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
The inside mirror has day and night side).
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
90
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３６：５６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９４
Mirrors, Power Windows
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

Except U.S. VP and LX, and
Canadian DX-G Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

AUTO − To open the driver’s
SWITCH window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. To stop
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) the window from going all the way
to raise or lower any window, push down, pull back on the window
The outside mirrors are heated to the switch down and hold it. Release switch briefly.
remove fog and frost. With the the switch when you want the
ignition switch in the ON (II) window to stop. Close the window by To close the driver’s window fully,
position, turn on the heaters by pulling the switch up and holding it. pull back the window switch firmly,
pressing the button. The indicator in then release it. To stop the window
the button comes on as a reminder. from going all the way up, push
Press the button again to turn the down on the window switch briefly.
heaters off.
91
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：０３３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９５
Power Windows
To open or close the driver’s window AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is
partially, push down or pull back on window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
the window switch lightly and hold it. is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
The window will stop when you reverse direction, and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The
release the switch. close the window, remove the power window system needs to be
obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery
The passenger windows cannot be again. or installing the fuse.
raised or lowered if the MAIN switch
is OFF. Keep the MAIN switch off Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and
when you have children in the window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch
vehicle so they do not injure always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open.
themselves by operating the objects are away from the window
windows unintentionally. before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
92
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：１４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９６
Power Windows
The power window system has a key- Power Window Control

off delay function. The windows will Operations UNLOCK BUTTON
still operate for up to 10 minutes Opening the Windows with the
after you turn off the ignition switch. Remote Transmitter
Opening either front door cancels You can open all of the windows
the delay function. You must turn from the outside with the remote Open

the ignition switch to ON (II) again transmitter.
before you can raise or lower the Close
windows. 1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a

second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all Opening/Closing the Windows with
four windows start to open. To the Key
stop the windows, release the You can open and close the windows
button. with the key in the driver’s door lock.
3. To open the windows further, To open:

press the button again. 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter. 2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
93
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９７
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and Moonroof To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
hold it. All four windows start to press and hold the center button
open. To stop the windows, . To close the moonroof, press
release the key. and hold the upper button . To
open the moonroof, press and hold
4. To open the windows further, turn the lower button . Release the
and hold the key again. button when the moonroof gets to
the desired position. Make sure
To close: everyone’s hands are away from the
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door moonroof before opening or closing
lock. it.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, MOONROOF SWITCH

then release it.
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Opening or closing the
3. Turn the key counterclockwise Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 moonroof on someone’s hands
again, and hold it. All four The moonroof has two positions: it or fingers can cause serious
windows start to close. To stop the can be tilted up in the back for injury.
windows, release the key. ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the Make sure all hands and fingers
4. To close the windows further, turn left dashboard vent to operate the are clear of the moonroof
and hold the key again. moonroof. The ignition switch must before opening or closing it.
be in the ON (II) position.
94
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９８
Moonroof, Parking Brake
The moonroof has a key-off delay Parking Brake

function. You can still open and close
the moonroof for up to 10 minutes Driving the vehicle with the parking
after you turn off the ignition switch. brake applied can damage the rear
The key-off delay function cancels as brakes and hubs.
soon as you open either front door.

You must then turn the ignition
switch to ON (II) to operate the
moonroof.
If you try to open the moonroof in PARKING BRAKE LEVER

below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can To apply the parking brake, pull the
damage the moonroof panel or motor. lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released with the engine running
(see page 59 ).
95
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：３６３１ＳＤＡ６３０００９９
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of
You can also use the sun visor at the the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun Except U.S. VP and
visor toward the side window. Canadian DX-G
The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.
96
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：４５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１００
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6

Canadian SE and SE-V6
DOOR ACTIVATED DOOR ACTIVATED Push on the spotlight lenses to turn
the light on and off.
Individual Interior Lights

ON
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when you open that door.
The light around the ignition switch
OFF only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light fades
COURTESY LIGHT out in about 30 seconds.
The ceiling lights have a three or U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6 In the U.S. VP and the Canadian DX-
two-position switch; ON (for three- Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 G, the front doors do not have
position), Door Activated, and OFF. The front ceiling light also contains courtesy lights.
In the Door Activated (center or left) two spotlights. Push the spotlight
position, the lights come on when lenses to turn them on and off.
you:
Open any door. The courtesy light between the
Unlock the doors with the key or spotlights comes on when you turn
remote transmitter. the parking lights on. To adjust its
After all doors are closed tightly, the brightness, turn the Select/Reset
light dims slightly, then fades out in knob on the instrument panel.
about 30 seconds.
97
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０１
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT and FRONT DOOR POCKET and CENTER POCKET,

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET BEVERAGE HOLDER COIN POCKET and
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
REAR DOOR POCKET
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
98
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３７：５８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０２
Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage

holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior. CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Accessory Power Sockets To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment
These sockets are intended to supply armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
power for 12 volt DC accessories left lever and lift up the armrest.
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 To close, lower the armrest, and
amps). None of the sockets will push it down until it latches. Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
power an automotive type cigarette The console compartment is
lighter element. When more than equipped with a coin holder.
one socket is being used, the
combined power rating of the
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
99
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：０５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０３
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G Open the glove box by pulling the
To open the sunglasses holder, push handle to the left. Close it with a firm
on the front edge. Make sure the push. Lock or unlock the glove box
holder is closed while you are driving. with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when

the parking lights are on.
100
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：１１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０４
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 102 Tape Search Functions ............. 133
system in your vehicle provides a Voice Control System................ 104 Caring for the Tape and
comfortable driving environment in Dual Temperature Control ........... 111 Player ...................................... 134
all weather conditions. Climate Control Sensors ............... 113 Playing the XMTM Satellite
Playing the Radio ........................... 114 Radio ....................................... 135
The standard audio system has Voice Control System................ 116 Satellite Digital Radio ................ 135
many features. This section de- To Play the Radio ...................... 116 To Play XMTM Satellite Radio.... 136
scribes those features and how to To Select a Station ..................... 116 To Select a Channel................... 136
Features
use them. Adjusting the Sound .................. 119 Satellite Radio Signals ............... 138
Radio Frequencies ..................... 120 Receiving Satellite Radio
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Radio Reception ......................... 120 Service..................................... 139
Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 Playing a CD ................................... 122 Steering Wheel Controls .............. 141
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Playing a CD, CD Changer ........... 124 Radio Theft Protection.................. 142
system that requires a code number To Play a CD .............................. 124 Setting the Clock ........................... 143
to enable it. To Stop Playing a CD ................ 127 Security System ............................. 144
Removing CDs from the Cruise Control ................................ 145
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Changer .................................. 127 HomeLink Universal
Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 Operating the Optional CD Transceiver................................. 148
The security system helps to dis- Changer .................................. 128
courage vandalism and theft of your CD Player Error Messages .......... 129
vehicle. Protecting your CDs...................... 130
General Information .................. 130
Protecting CDs........................... 130
Playing a Tape ................................ 131
To Play a Tape ........................... 132
To Stop Playing a Tape ............. 132
101
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０５
Vents, Heating, and A/C
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6 U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6 Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE FAN SPEED TEMPERATURE

CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL INDICATOR CONTROL DIAL
(DRIVER’S SIDE) (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
REAR WINDOW MODE

DEFOGGER BUTTON
BUTTON FAN CONTROL
AIR BUTTONS AIR
CONDITIONING WINDSHIELD CONDITIONING
BUTTON DEFROST BUTTON BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON MODE BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW
OFF BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD

DEFROST BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
102
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：２２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０６
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Features
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
BUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
AUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
103
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０７
Voice Control System EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
Only on models equipped with System Press the DUAL button. The
Navigation System You can manually select the fan indicator in the button will come on.
The climate control system for your speed by pressing the A/C button The driver and passenger can each
vehicle can also be operated using next to the display and then, select the temperature control
the voice control system. See the pressing the fan control icons. buttons ( ▲ or ▼ ) to the
Navi section in your Quick Start desired setting.
Guide for an overview of this system, Temperature Control
and the Navigation System manual Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation EX-L and EX-V6
for complete details. System When the indicator in the DUAL
Turning this dial clockwise increases button is off, both sides adjust to the
Fan Control the temperature of the airflow. driver’s side temperature.
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6
Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6 EX-L and EX-V6
Turn this dial to increase or decrease The driver and passenger can select
the fan speed and airflow. independent temperature settings by
selecting the DUAL button.
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
You can manually select the fan EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation
speed by pressing the fan control System
buttons. The fan speed is Push the DUAL button. When the
represented by vertical bars in the indicator in the button is on, turn the
display. dials to adjust the temperature.
104
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０８
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button EX-L and EX-V6 Recirculation Button

Except EX-L and EX-V6 When the A/C is off, the airflow When the recirculation indicator is
Press the A/C button to turn the temperature does not fall below the on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
air conditioning on or off. The outside air temperature. When you sent throughout the system again.
indicator in the button is on when set the airflow temperature lower When the indicator is off, air is
the air conditioning is on. than the outside air temperature, brought in from the outside of the
make sure the A/C is on. vehicle (fresh air mode).
EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation
Features
System The outside air intakes for the
Press the A/C button to turn the air heating and cooling system are at
conditioning on and off. The display the base of the windshield. Keep this
shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ when the air area clear of leaves and other debris.
conditioning is on. The display
shows ‘‘A/C OFF’’ when the air The system should be left in fresh
conditioning is off. air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation mode, particularly with the A/C off,
System can cause the windows to fog up.
The display shows ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ Switch to recirculation mode when
after you press the A/C button. The driving through dusty or smoky
display shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ after you conditions, then return to fresh air
touch ‘‘ON’’ to turn the air mode.
conditioning on. The display shows
‘‘A/C OFF’’ after you touch ‘‘OFF’’ to Rear Window Defogger Button
turn the air conditioning off. This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 72 ).
105
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３８：５７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１０９
Mode Control When you select or , MAX A/C Button

Use the mode control buttons or the system automatically switches to U.S. VP, SE, EX and LX-V6
icons to select the vents the air flows Fresh Air mode and turns on the Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
from. Some air flows from the A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays The system automatically
dashboard corner vents in all modes. on with the indicator off. turns on the A/C, selects ,
and switches to recirculation mode.
Air flows from the center When you select , the system Each indicator above the button is on
and corner vents in the dashboard. automatically switches to fresh air when the MAX A/C is turned on.
mode.
Airflow is divided between Ventilation
the vents in the dashboard and the EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation The flow-through ventilation system
floor vents. System draws in outside air, circulates it
Each time you press the MODE through the interior, then exhausts it
Air flows from the floor button, the display shows the mode through vents near the rear window.
vents. selected.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
Airflow is divided between EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation limit.
the floor vents and the defroster System 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
vents at the base of the windshield. Press the A/C button to view the 3. Select and fresh air mode.
display, then touch any of the mode 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Air flows from the defroster icons on the display.
vents at the base of the windshield.
106
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：０８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１０
Using the Heater Using the A/C EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load 1. Press the A/C button, the Manual
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine Operation A/C screen will appear.
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page 2. Select the ON icon on the display.
feel warm air coming through the 65 ). If it moves near the red zone, 3. Select the desired temperature
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge and MODE selections. If the
reading returns to normal. outside air is humid, select the
Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation Recirculation mode. If the outside
Features
System Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
1. Select . System
When you select , the system 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the If the interior is very warm, you can
automatically switches to the fresh ON button. The indicator in the cool it down more rapidly by partially
air mode. button comes on when a fan speed opening the windows, turning on the
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. is selected. A/C, and setting the fan to
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature maximum speed in fresh air mode.
the temperature control dial. control dial or button is set to
maximum cool. Except EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System 3. Select . To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Press the A/C button, the manual 4. If the outside air is humid, select 1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
operation of A/C screen will Recirculation mode. If the outside 2. Select the MAX A/C mode.
appear. air is dry, select Fresh Air mode. The system automatically turns on
2. Select the desired mode and fan 5. Set the fan to the desired speed. the A/C, selects and
speed icons on the display. switches to Recirculation mode.
3. Adjust for warmth with the 3. Make sure the temperature
temperature buttons (▲ or ▼). control dial is all the way to the left.
107
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１１
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost When you switch to , from
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the or mode, the A/C
moisture from the air. When used in windows: stays on whether the indicator is on
combination with the heater, it or off. This helps prevent the
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or windows from rapidly fogging up
high for faster defrosting. when the air is suddenly routed away
1. Turn the fan on. 2. Select . The system from the windshield. If you want to
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if automatically switches to fresh air turn the A/C off, press and release
equipped). mode and turns on the A/C. The the A/C button until the indicator in
3. Select and fresh air mode. A/C indicator will not come on if it the button comes on and then goes
4. Adjust the temperature control was previously off. off.
dial or buttons to your preference. 3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
This setting is suitable for all driving 4. Select to help clear the
conditions whenever the outside rear window.
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
108
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：２５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１２
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice Automatic Climate Control Press the AUTO button.
From the Windows EX-L and EX-V6 Without Navigation System: Set the
1. Select . The system The automatic climate control desired temperature by turning
automatically switches to fresh air system adjusts the fan speed and the Temperature Control dial. You
mode and turns on the A/C. The airflow levels to maintain the interior will see AUTO in the system’s
A/C indicator does not come on if temperature you select. display.
it was previously off. With Navigation System: Set the
2. Select . For Vehicles with Navigation System desired temperature by pressing
Features
3. Set the fan and temperature In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s the ▲ to raise the temperature or
controls to maximum level. interior temperature is ▼ to lower the temperature. The
independently regulated for the selected temperature will show in
To clear the windows faster, you can driver and passenger. If the driver’s the upper display.
close the dashboard corner vents by side of the vehicle is getting too
rotating the wheel below each vent. much sun, the system will adjust to a
This sends more warm air to the lower temperature.
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have

a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
109
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：３７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１３
The system automatically selects the Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off
proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various Press the OFF button. However, a
heated air to raise or lower the functions of the automatic climate lack of airflow can cause the
interior temperature to the control system when it is in AUTO. windows to fog up. You should keep
temperature you selected. All other features remain the fan on at all times so stale air and
automatically controlled. moisture do not build up in the
If you set the temperature to its interior and cause fogging.
lowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit, EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation
(Hi) the system runs at full cooling System If you press OFF, the climate control
or heating only. It does not regulate Making any manual selection causes system shuts off.
the interior temperature. the word AUTO in the display to go −Keep the system off for short
out. periods only.
In cold weather, the fan will not −To keep stale air and mustiness
come on automatically until the EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System from collecting, you should have
heater starts to develop warm air. If you press the A/C button next to the fan running at all times.
the display, the manual selections
Dual Temperature Control − When will show in the display. Making any With Navigation System
the indicator in the Dual button is on, manual selection causes the When the Climate Control System is
the driver’s side and passenger’s side indicator in the AUTO button to turn turned OFF, the temperature in the
temperature can be controlled off. upper display will also turn off.
independently (see page 111 ).
Except EX and EX-V6
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
110
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：４５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１４
Dual Temperature Control
EX-L and EX-V6 Without Navigation System

Without Navigation System
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
With Navigation System DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
Your vehicle has four temperature TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
control buttons, two for the driver, CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
Features
and two for the passenger. DUAL BUTTON
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons With Navigation System
when the green indicator in the
DUAL button is lit.
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Push AUTO or . The selected
temperatures appear in the upper
display. For vehicles with navigation
system, when the indicator in the DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
DUAL button is off, you can adjust TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
both sides to the same temperature CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
by adjusting the driver’s side DUAL BUTTON
temperature control dial or buttons.
CONTINUED
111
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：５０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１５
Dual Temperature Control
To set the driver’s side temperature

to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
side to a different value than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its

lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
112
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：３９：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１６
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
If your vehicle has a climate control
system TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Features
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
113
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１７
Playing the Radio
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6 EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
STEREO INDICATOR STEREO INDICATOR PRESET BARS

AM/FM SCAN BUTTON AM/FM
BUTTON BUTTON
A.SEL A.SEL
BUTTON BUTTON
TUNE BAR TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR SEEK BAR
PRESET BARS SOUND BUTTON SCAN BUTTON SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB PWR/VOL KNOB
114
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：０７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１８
Playing the Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
UPPER
DISPLAY
Features
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
PRESET
ICONS
SEEK BAR
TUNE/
SOUND
KNOB
PWR/VOL AUDIO SCAN SOUND ICON
KNOB SELECT ICON
ICON
115
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０５：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１１９
Playing the Radio
Voice Control System To Play the Radio To Select a Station

Only on models equipped with The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to
Navigation System ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) find radio stations on the selected
The audio system for your vehicle position. Turn the system on by band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
can also be operated using the voice pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the SELECT, and the preset bars or
control system. See the Navi section FM/AM button. Adjust the volume icons.
in your Quick Start Guide for an by turning the PWR/VOL knob.
overview of this system, and the TUNE − Use the TUNE bar or
navigation system manual for For Vehicles with Navigation System knob to tune the radio to a desired
complete details. Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY frequency. Press the side of the
button will also turn on the system. bar or turn the knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, and the
The band and frequency that the side or turn the knob to the left
radio was last tuned to is displayed. to tune to a lower frequency.
To change bands, press the FM/AM
button. On the FM band, ST will be SEEK − The seek function
displayed if the station is broadcast- searches up and down from the
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on current frequency to find a station
AM is not available. with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
XM satellite radio information is bar, then release it.
available on page 135 .
116
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２０
Playing the Radio
SCAN − The SCAN function Preset − Each preset bar or icon 3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6)
samples all stations with strong can store one frequency on AM, and you want for that station. Press
signals on the selected band. To two frequencies on FM. the left or right side of the bar or
activate it, press the SCAN button, icon and hold it until you hear a
then release it. You will see SCAN in 1. Select the desired band, AM or beep.
the display. The system will scan for FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
a station with a strong signal. When two frequencies with each preset 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
it finds one, it will stop and play that bar or icon. total of six stations on AM and
Features
station for about five seconds. For Vehicles with Navigation System twelve stations on FM.
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
If you do nothing, the system will to view the preset icons.
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for five seconds. When it 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
plays a station you want to listen to, function to tune the radio to a
press the SCAN button again. desired station.
117
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：２９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２１
Playing the Radio
The preset frequencies will be lost if AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations Auto
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is traveling far from home and can no Select has stored, you can store
disconnected, or the radio fuse is longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset bars
removed. you can use the auto select feature to or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
find stations in the local area. SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
Press the A. SEL button or touch the icons as described previously.
Auto Select icon. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go To turn off Auto Select, press the A.
into scan mode for several seconds. SEL button or Auto Select icon. This
It stores the frequencies of six AM, restores the presets you originally
and twelve FM stations in the preset set.
bars (1 − 6) or icons. You will see a
‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset
bar or icon if Auto Select cannot find
a strong station for every preset bar
or icon.
118
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：３８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２２
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound For Vehicles without Navigation System The system will automatically return
Press the SOUND button or icon, or Each mode is shown in the display as the display to the selected audio
press the TUNE knob repeatedly to it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob mode about five seconds after you
display the Bass (BAS), Treble or touch the icon to adjust the stop adjusting a mode. On vehicles
(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader setting to your liking. When the level with navigation system, touch the
(FAD) settings. On vehicles with reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ RETURN icon to go back to the
navigation system, touch the in the display. audio screen.
SOUND icon or press the TUNE
Features
knob. For Vehicles with Navigation System
Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
Balance/Fader − These two TRE icons. The adjustment shows
modes adjust the strength of the you the current setting.
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, Touch the left or right bars on the
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back sound grid. Balance is equalized
strength. when the vertical lines are centered
on the grid.
Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your Touch the front or rear bars on the
liking. sound grid. The fader is equalized
when the horizontal lines are
For Vehicles with Navigation System centered on the grid.
If you want to adjust the sound while
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
119
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：４６３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２３
Playing the Radio
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 AM station, you will notice the sound
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). volume becoming weaker and the
Stations on the FM band are station drifting in and out. If you are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
Stations must use these exact Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
frequencies. It is fairly common for go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
stations to round-off the frequency in completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
their advertising, so your radio could the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
display a frequency of 100.9 even are close to.
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
120
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４０：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２４
Playing the Radio
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
121
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２５
Playing a CD
U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6 Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
CD RDM UPPER DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
PRESET
BAR CD BUTTON
CD LOAD
SEEK/SKIP INDICATOR
BAR SCAN AUDIO
CD SLOT BUTTON DISPLAY
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System
CD BUTTON PRESET BAR RPT BUTTON PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP RDM
BAR BUTTON CD SLOT CHANGE
DISC
EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON LOAD
BUTTON TRACK DISC RANDOM
CD SLOT RPT RPT ICON
LOAD ICON ICON
BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD LOAD INDICATOR EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
122
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２６
Playing a CD
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
UPPER DISPLAY
CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON

CD BUTTON
AUDIO
Features
DISPLAY
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON SEEK BAR
EJECT
BUTTON PWR/VOL
SEEK/SKIP KNOB
BAR CD SLOT
LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

CHANGE
CD LOAD DISC
INDICATOR LOAD BUTTON
BUTTON
RANDOM
PWR/VOL KNOB ICON
TRACK
RPT DISC RPT EJECT
ICON ICON BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
123
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２７
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Play a CD For Vehicles without in-dash CD For Vehicles with Satellite Radio
To load or play CDs, the ignition changer To listen to satellite radio when a CD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY Insert a CD into the CD slot. The is playing, press the CD/AUX XM
(I) or ON(II) position. drive will pull the CD in the rest of button.
the way to play it. When the system
You operate the CD player/CD reaches the end of the disc, it will To play the tape when a CD is
changer with the same controls used return to the beginning and play the playing, insert a tape in the player
for the radio. To select the CD disc again. (optional). If a tape is in the player,
player/CD changer, press the CD press the AUX button. Press the CD
button. The number of the track To play the radio when a CD is button again to switch back to the
playing is shown in the display. With playing, press the AM/FM button. CD player. The cassette player is
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and Press the CD button again to switch optional on all U.S. models.
track numbers are displayed. The back to the CD player.
system will continuously play a CD If you turn the system off while a CD
until you change modes. is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. will begin playing where it left off.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
124
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：２５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２８
For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer You can also load a CD into an empty For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer
1. Press the LOAD button until you position while a CD is playing. Select To select a different disc, press the
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the the empty position (the disc number appropriate side of a preset bar
display. indicator is not highlighted) and (1−6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC −)
2. The disc number for an empty press the appropriate preset bar or to select the previous disc or Preset
position is highlighted and the red touch a disc icon. The current CD 6 (DISC ＋) to select the next disc in
light starts blinking. stops playing and starts the loading sequence. On vehicles with
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot sequence. The CD just loaded will navigation system, touch the
Features
when the green CD load indicator play. appropriate disc icon or press the ▲
comes on. Insert it only about or ▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If
halfway; the drive will pull it in the You operate the CD changer with you select an empty position in the
rest of the way. You will see the same controls used for the radio. CD changer, the system will try to
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD The numbers of the disc and track load the CD in the next available slot.
load indicator turns red and blinks playing are shown in the display. On
as the CD is loaded. vehicles with navigation system,
4. When the CD load indicator turns these numbers also appear in the
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the upper display.
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, the
system begins playing the last CD
loaded.
125
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：３４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１２９
For Vehicles without Navigation System RANDOM − Press to play the EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
SEEK/SKIP − Push the to tracks in random order. You will see To use the controls, press the
play the next track on the disc. Push RDM in the display. Press the RDM AUDIO DISPLAY button, the control
the once to replay the track in button again to return to normal play. icons will appear on the screen.
play; press it twice to replay the
previous track. To move rapidly SCAN − The SCAN function TRACK SCAN − Press the icon or
within a track, press and hold the samples all the tracks on the SCAN button, to get a 10 second
or button. selected disc in the order they are sampling of each track on the
recorded. To activate it, press and current CD. Press the icon or button
REPEAT − Press to continuously release the SCAN button. You will again to turn it off.
replay a track. You will see RPT in see SCAN in the display, and you will
the display. Press the RPT button get a 10 second sampling of each DISC SCAN − Touch to get a 10
again to turn it off. track on the selected CD. Press the second sampling of the first song of
SCAN button again to get out of scan each disc in the CD changer. Touch
mode. the icon again to turn it off.
TRACK RPT − Touch to

continuously play the same song on
the CD. Press the icon again to stop
the function.
126
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３０
DISC RPT − Touch the icon to U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Removing CDs from the Changer
continuously replay the current CD. Press the AM/FM or XM/CD U.S. EX-L and EX-V6
Touch again to turn it off. button to switch to the radio or Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
satellite radio while a CD is playing. To remove the disc currently playing,
TRACK RDM − Touch the icon to Press the CD button again to play press the EJECT button. When a
play the current CD in random order. the CD. disc is removed from a slot, the
Touch again to stop. system automatically begins the load
If a tape is in the optional tape player, sequence so you can load another
Features
CH DISC − Selects an icon and press the AUX button to switch to CD in that position. If you do not
plays the disc. the tape while a CD is playing. Press remove the disc from the changer
the CD button again to switch back within 15 seconds, the system
To Stop Playing a CD to the CD player. returns to the previous mode (AM/
For Vehicles with CD Player or FM or satellite radio). The disc will
Changer If you turn the system off while a CD reload into the system and will
Press the eject button ( ) to is playing, the CD will stay in the remain there in a pause mode.
remove the CD. If you eject the CD, drive. When you turn the system
but do not remove it from the slot, back on, the CD will begin playing To remove a different disc from the
the system will automatically reload where it left off. changer, first select it with the
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in appropriate preset bar or icon. When
pause mode. To begin playing, press that CD begins playing, press the
the CD button. eject button. Continue pressing the
EJECT button to remove all the discs
from the changer.
127
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３１
Operating the Optional CD Load the desired CDs in the On LX model, if there are no CDs in
Changer magazine, and load the magazine in the changer, the display will flash,
U.S. VP and LX the changer according to the and you will have to select another
Canadian DX-G and SE instructions that came with the unit. mode.
An optional six or eight disc CD
changer is available for your vehicle To select the CD changer, press the
from your dealer. CD button. The disc and track
This disc changer uses the same numbers will be displayed. To select
controls used for the in-dash CD a different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC
player/changer or the radio. −), for a previous disc; or Preset 6
(DISC ＋), to select the next disc in
sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
128
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４１：５４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３２
CD Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a CD, find the Error Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
the vehicle to your dealer. FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Features
Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CDs.
Changer
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
129
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３３
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the system. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. See these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
this page. and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.
130
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３４
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
US. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6 U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT
CD/AUX BUTTON
CD/SAT RADIO UPPER
BUTTON BUTTON DISPLAY
Features
AUDIO
SEEK/SKIP DISPLAY
BAR BUTTON
PRESET BARS PWR/VOL KNOB
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System

CH/DISC
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION BAR
INDICATOR
SEEKBAR
CD/AUX RPT
BUTTON BUTTON
TUNE/
SOUND
PWR/VOL KNOB
KNOB
SEEK BAR
PROG ICON RPT ICON NR ICON

PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
131
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３５
To Play a Tape Dolby＊ noise reduction turns on To Stop Playing a Tape

Optional on all U.S. models when you insert a tape. The To remove the tape, press the
The ignition switch must be in indicator will light in the EJECT button on the cassette player.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make display. If the tape was not recorded If you want to turn the player off,
sure the open side of the tape is in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the press the PWR/VOL knob or turn
facing right, then insert the tape Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar off the ignition. The tape will remain
most of the way into the slot. The or touching the NR icon. Dolby in the drive.
system will pull the tape in the rest remains off until you press the When you turn the system back on,
of the way, and begin to play it. preset bar or the icon again. the tape player will be in pause mode.
Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
＊
The tape direction indicator will light Dolby noise reduction side of the preset bar or touch the
to show you which side of the tape is manufactured under license from PROG icon on vehicles with
playing. The ▲ indicates the side Dolby laboratories licensing navigation system to resume play.
you inserted upward in now playing. Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the
If you want to play the other side, double-D symbol are trademarks To switch to the radio or CD player
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) of the Dolby Laboratories while a tape is playing, press the
side of the preset bar or press the Licensing Corporation. AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/
AUDIO DISPLAY button and touch AUX XM button. To change back to
the PROG icon. When the player the tape player, push the CD/AUX
reaches the end of the tape, it will button or CD/AUX XM button.
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
132
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３６
Tape Search Functions SKIP − Press the side to find For Vehicles with Navigation System
FF/REW − To rewind the tape, the beginning of the current song or If you see the error message
push the Preset 1 (REW) side of the passage. Press the side to find ‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
preset bar or the upper side (▲) of the beginning of the next song or tape eject button to remove the tape
the CH DISC bar. You will see REW passage. When the system reaches from the unit. Make sure the tape is
in the display. To fast forward the the beginning of a song or passage, it not damaged. If the tape will not
tape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side of begins to play it. eject or the error message stays on
the preset bar. You will see FF dis- after the tape ejects, take your
Features
played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 REPEAT − Press the RPT button vehicle to your dealer.
side of the bars or the lower side or icon to continuously play a song or
(▼) of the CH DISC bar to take the passage. You will see RPT displayed.
system out of rewind or fast forward. The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button or icon again.
FF/REW − To rewind the tape NOTE: The SKIP and REPEAT
push the upper side (▲) of the CH functions use silent periods on the
DISC bar. To fast forward the tape, tape to find the end of a song or
push the lower side (▼) of the CH passage. These features may not
DISC bar. Press either side of the work if there is almost no gap
PROG icon in the audio display to between selections, a high noise
take the system out of rewind or fast level, or a silent period in the middle
forward. of a selection.
133
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３７
Caring for the Tape and Player If you do not clean the tape player If the tape is loose, tighten it by
The tape player picks up dirt and regularly, it may eventually become turning the hub with a pencil or your
oxides from the tape. This impossible to remove the finger. If the label is peeling off,
contamination builds up over time contamination with a normal remove it or it could cause the tape
and causes the sound quality to cleaning kit. Your dealer has a to jam in the player. Never try to
degrade. To prevent this, you should cleaning kit available. insert a warped or damaged tape in
clean the player after every 30 hours the player.
of use. Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or Store tapes in their cases to protect
jam the drive. them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects

into the tape player.
134
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３８
Playing the XMTM Satellite Radio
Satellite Digital Radio U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 U.S. EX-L and EX-V6
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System with Navigation System
Your vehicle is capable of receiving CATEGORY/CHANNEL
XMTM Satellite Radio anywhere in the CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR
United States except Hawaii, Alaska, MODE INDICATOR SAT RADIO AUDIO
and Canada. BUTTON DISPLAY
SAT RADIO DISP BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON SCAN
XM is a registered trademark of BUTTON
Features
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.

models only.
TUNE
SEEK/ BAR
SKIP/
BAR PRESET SEEK/
BARS SKIP/
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON PWR/VOL TUNE
KNOB KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET

SCAN ICON ICONS
MODE ICON
135
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：５１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１３９
To Play XMTM Satellite Radio DISP − TUNE −

The ignition must be in the For Vehicles with Navigation System For Vehicles with Navigation System
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Press and release this button to Turn the TUNE knob to change
Turn the system on: change the display. The display will channels. Turn the knob right for
change in the following sequence: higher numbered channels and left
For Vehicles with Navigation System channel name, channel number, for lower numbered channels.
Push any of the following: PWR/ category, artist name, and music title. Vehicles without Navigation System
VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, or Press the TUNE bar to change
AUDIO button. channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and
Vehicles without Navigation System for lower numbered channels.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/AUX XM
button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust

the volume.
To Select a Channel
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
136
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４２：５９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４０
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)− The SCAN − The scan function samples For Vehicles with Navigation System
seek/skip function selects the all channels for 5 seconds. To Once your XM channels are preset,
various categories in XM, such as activate the function, push the SCAN pressing the CH DISC button will
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc. button. Push it again to get out of the select your preset channels.
Push the to change the sequence.
category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To Preset − Each preset icon or button
search for channels within a can store one channel in XM1 and
Features
category, turn the TUNE knob one in XM2.
clockwise or press the TUNE bar 1. Push the CD/AUX XM button.
. (You will see XM1 or XM2.)
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
3. Pick a preset icon or button and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and XM2.
CONTINUED
137
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４１
Satellite Radio Signals

Satellite radio receives signals from
Signal may be two satellites to produce clear, high-
blocked by quality digital reception. It offers
mountains or
large obstacles many channels in several categories.
to the south. Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south
SATELLITE of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND
REPEATER
138
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４２
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: Receiving Satellite Radio Service
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly If your XM Radio service has expired
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for or you purchased your vehicle from
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s a previous owner, you can listen to a
authority to operate the equipment. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on an east/west road with on XM Satellite Radio. With the
a mountain on the south side of ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
the road. (I) or ON (II) position, push the
Features
Driving on the north side of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
large commercial truck on an system and press the CD/AUX XM
east/west road. button. A variety of music types and
Driving in tunnels. styles will play.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
There may be other geographic

situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
CONTINUED
139
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：１８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４３
If you decide to purchase XM While awaiting activation, make sure

Satellite Radio service, contact XM your vehicle remains in an open area
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at with good reception. Once your
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
them your radio I.D. number and or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
your credit card number. and you will be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
To get your XM Satellite radio ID continue to send an activation signal
number: to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ from activation request. If the
appears in the display. Your I.D. will service has not been activated after
appear in the display. 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
After you have registered with XM

Radio, keep your audio system in the
SAT Radio mode while you await
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
140
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：２５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４４
Steering Wheel Controls
U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top
MODE BUTTON the desired volume is reached, then (＋) of the CH button. Press the
release it. bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it twice to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
Features
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display.
XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.
If you are playing a tape in the
If you are listening to the radio, use optional tape player, press the top
the CH button to change stations. (＋) of the CH button to advance to
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON Each time you press the top (＋) of the next selection. Press the bottom
the button, the system goes to the (−) to go back to the previous
Three controls for the audio system next preset station on the band you selection. The system senses a silent
are mounted in the steering wheel are listening to. Press the bottom period, then resumes playing.
hub. These let you control basic (−) to go back to the previous
functions without removing your station.
hand from the wheel.
141
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４５
Radio Theft Protection
Except U.S. VP and LX If your vehicle’s battery is discon- digits the same way.
Except Canadian DX-G and SE nected or goes dead, the audio
Your vehicle’s audio system will system will disable itself. If this If you make a mistake entering the
disable itself if it is disconnected happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the code, do not start over; complete the
from electrical power for any reason. frequency display the next time you five-digit sequence, then enter the
To make it work again, you must turn on the system. Use the preset correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter a specific five-digit code using buttons to enter the five-digit code. enter the correct code. If you are
the preset bars or the TUNE knob. The code is on the radio code card unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
Because there are hundreds of included in your Owner’s Manual kit. must then leave the system on for 1
number combinations possible from When it is entered correctly, the hour before trying again.
the five digits, making the system radio will start playing.
work without knowing the exact If the code card is lost, a dealer can
code is nearly impossible. If your vehicle is equipped with a access your code with your radio’s
navigation system, press and release serial number. To access the serial
You should have received a card that the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’ number, turn the radio on. It must
lists your audio system code number appears on the display. display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio
and serial number. It is best to store off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and
this card in a safe place at home. In If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code, power buttons at the same time, then
addition, you should write the audio press and release the TUNE knob to quickly release.
system’s serial number in this owner’s store it.
manual. You will have to store your favorite
If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your stations on each side of the preset
If you lose the card, you must obtain code, turn the TUNE knob left or bars (1 − 6) after the system begins
the code number from a dealer. To right until the first digit is displayed. working. Your original settings were
do this, you will need the system’s Press and release the TUNE knob to lost when power was disconnected.
serial number. store it. Enter the remaining three
142
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：４０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４６
Setting the Clock
For Vehicles without Navigation System For Vehicles without Navigation System
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will DIGITAL CLOCK
need to set the clock.
Press and hold the SOUND button

until you hear a beep. The displayed
time begins to blink. Press on the H
Features
(Preset 4) side of the bar until the PRESET BARS
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (Preset 5) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
When you are finished, press the SOUND BUTTON
SOUND button again to set the time.
You can quickly set the time to the For example:
nearest hour. Pressing and holding 1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
the SOUND button, then pressing 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
the R (Preset 6) side of the bar sets
the clock back to the previous hour. For Vehicles with Navigation System
If the displayed time is after the half Refer to the Navigation System
hour, the clock sets the clock Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
143
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：４７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４７
Security System
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR With the system set, you can still
Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 open the trunk with the remote
The security system helps to protect transmitter without triggering the
your vehicle and valuables from theft. alarm. The alarm will sound if the
The horn sounds and a combination trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
of headlights, parking lights, side opened with the trunk release lever
marker lights and taillights flashes if or the emergency trunk opener.
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This The security system will not set if
alarm continues for two minutes, the hood, trunk, or any door is not
then the system resets. To reset an fully closed. If the system will not set,
alarming system before the two check the Door Monitor on the
minutes have elapsed, unlock either instrument panel (see page 60 ), to
front door with the key or the Once the security system is set, see if the doors and trunk are fully
remote transmitter. opening any door (without using the closed. Since it is not part of the
key or the remote transmitter), the monitor display, manually check the
The security system automatically hood, or the trunk will cause it to hood.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the sound. It also sounds if the radio is
doors, hood, and trunk. For the removed from the dashboard or the Do not attempt to alter this system
system to activate, you must lock the wiring is cut. or add other devices to it.
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
light on the instrument panel starts
blinking immediately to show you
the system is setting itself.
144
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４３：５４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４８
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) SET button on the steering wheel.
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL light on
accelerator pedal. It should be used the instrument panel comes on to
for cruising on straight, open show the system is now activated.
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Features
Improper use of the cruise CANCEL DECEL/SET RES/ACCEL
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
when traveling on open Button on the steering wheel. The
highways in good weather. CRUISE MAIN light on the
instrument panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
145
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：０３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１４９
Cruise Control
The cruise control may not hold the Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac- Tap the brake or clutch pedal
set speed when you are going up and celerate to the desired cruising lightly with your foot. The
down hills. If your speed increases speed and press the DECEL/SET CRUISE CONTROL light on the
going down a hill, use the brakes to button. instrument panel will go out.
slow down. This will cancel the When the car slows to the desired
cruise control. To resume the set To increase the speed in very speed, press the DECEL/SET
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. small amounts, tap the RES/ button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on the ACCEL button. Each time you do
instrument panel will come back on. this, your vehicle will speed up Even with the cruise control turned
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). on, you can still use the accelerator
Changing the Set Speed pedal to speed up for passing. After
You can increase the set cruising You can decrease the set cruising completing the pass, take your foot
speed in any of these ways: speed in any of these ways: off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. When you reach the button. Release the button when Resting your foot on the brake or
desired cruising speed, release the you reach the desired speed. clutch pedal causes the cruise
button. control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
146
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５０
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pressing the Cruise Control Master
You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button, Button turns the system off and
of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the erases the previous cruising speed.
system will remember the
Tap the brake or clutch pedal. previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
Push the CANCEL button on the above 25 mph (40 km/h) then press
steering wheel. and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Features
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Push the cruise control master comes on. The vehicle will accelerate
button. to the same cruising speed as before.
147
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５１
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If equipped that causes the motor to stop and Training HomeLink

The HomeLink universal reverse if an obstacle is detected Before you begin − If you just
transceiver built into your vehicle during closing, increasing the risk of received your vehicle and have not
can be programmed to operate up to injury. trained any of the buttons in
three remotely controlled devices HomeLink before, you should erase
around your home, such as garage Important Safety Precautions any previously learned codes before
doors, lighting, or home security Always refer to the opening training the first button.
systems. instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door To do this, press and hold the two
General Information opener or other equipment you outside buttons on the HomeLink
If you are training HomeLink to intend to operate with HomeLink. If transceiver for about 20 seconds,
operate a garage door or gate, you you do not have this information, until the red indicator flashes.
should unplug the motor for that contact the manufacturer of the Release the buttons, then proceed to
device during training. Repeatedly equipment. step 1.
pressing the remote control button If you are training the second or
could burn out the motor. For quick and accurate training, third buttons, go directly to step 1.
make sure the remote control
HomeLink stores the code in a transmitter for the device (garage 1. Unplug the garage door opener
permanent memory. There should door, automatic gate, security motor from the electrical outlet.
be no need to retrain HomeLink if system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is 2. Hold the end of the garage door
disconnected. If your garage door opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
opener was manufactured before HomeLink. Make sure you are not
April 1982, you may not be able to blocking your view of the red
program HomeLink to operate it. indicator in HomeLink.
They do not have the safety feature
148
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５２
If the red indicator in HomeLink second.

continues to flash slowly (does If the button works,
not flash rapidly), your remote programming is complete.
transmitter may stop If the button does not work go
transmitting after a short time. to step 6.
Go to step 4.
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
4. Press and hold the remote button for a few seconds, then
Features
transmitter button and one of the watch the red indicator on
HomeLink buttons at the same HomeLink.
time. While continuing to hold the If the indicator stays on or
HomeLink button, press and flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
release the remote transmitter thru 5.
3. Press and hold the remote button every 2 seconds. If the indicator flashes rapidly
transmitter button and one of the If the red indicator in HomeLink for 2 seconds then stays on, you
HomeLink buttons at the same begins to flash slowly at first, have a rolling code transmitter:
time. then rapidly, release both Go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
If the red indicator in HomeLink buttons, and go to step 5. Code System’’ (see page 150 ).
begins to flash slowly at first, If the red indicator in HomeLink
then rapidly, release both continues to flash slowly (does 7. Repeat these steps to train the
buttons, and go to step 5. not begin to flash rapidly), other two HomeLink buttons to
repeat steps 2 thru 4. operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
5. Plug in the garage door opener around your home (lighting,
motor, then test the HomeLink automatic gate, security system,
button by pushing it for about 1 etc.).
149
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：３８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５３
Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may
door opener. require you to press the button up
to three times.)
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again.
proper garage door opener code. It should operate the garage door.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your

garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
150
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５４
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired
Features
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
148 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
151
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４４：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５６
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 154

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 154
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 156
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 156
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 157
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 159
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 160
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 161
read the information in this section Improving Fuel Economy ......... 161
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 162
Accessories................................. 162
Modifying Your Vehicle............ 163
Additional Safety Precautions .. 163
Carrying Cargo .............................. 164
Load Limits................................. 165
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
or on a Roof Rack .................. 166
Carrying Items in the
Passenger Compartment ...... 166
153
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４５：０５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５７
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation We recommend quality gasoline

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate containing detergent additives that
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump help prevent fuel system and engine
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use deposits.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause
During this period: a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping In addition, in order to maintain good
noise that can lead to engine damage. performance, fuel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. For vehicles with manual transmission recommend, in areas where it is
You may hear a knocking noise from available, the use of gasoline that
Do not change the oil until the the engine if you drive the vehicle at does NOT contain manganese-based
scheduled maintenance time. low engine speed (below about 1,000 fuel additives such as MMT.
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
Avoid hard braking for the first raise the engine speed by shifting to
200 miles (300 km). a lower gear.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these

recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
154
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４５：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５８
Fuel Recommendation
Some gasoline today is blended with If you notice any undesirable For further important fuel-related
oxygenates such as ethanol or operating symptoms, try another information, please refer to your
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to service station or switch to another Quick Start Guide.
operate on oxygenated gasoline brand of gasoline.
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
Before Driving
155
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４５：１７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１５９
Service Station Procedure
Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as
Gasoline is highly flammable pressure inside the tank escapes.
and explosive. You can be The fuel fill cap is attached to the
Push burned or seriously injured fuel filler with a tether. Put the
when handling fuel. attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
Handle fuel only outdoors. nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Wipe up spills immediately. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
to the gas pump. even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
2. To open the fuel fill door, push vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
down on the lever located to the system. The system helps keep
left of the driver’s seat. fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
TETHER pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
FUEL FILL CAP
156
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：１８：５８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６０
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 251 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the odometer/
outside temperature display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
Before Driving
it latches.
To Open the Hood: 2. Put your fingers under the front

1. Park the vehicle, and set the edge of the hood near the center.
parking brake. Pull the hood Slide your hand to the left until
release handle located under the you feel the hood latch handle.
lower left corner of the dashboard. Push this handle up to release it.
The hood will pop up slightly. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,

or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
157
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４５：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６１
To Close the Hood:

4-cylinder models
SUPPORT ROD Lift it up slightly to remove the
support rod from the hole. Put the
support rod back into its holding clip.
Lower the hood to about a foot (30
cm) above the fender, then let it
drop. Make sure it is securely
latched.
6-cylinder models
Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models above the fender, then press down
firmly with your hands. Make sure it
3. 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models is securely latched.
Pull the support rod out of its clip Lift the hood up most of the way.
and insert the end into the hole on The hydraulic supports will lift it
the front of the hood near the up the rest of the way and hold it
center. up.
158
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０６：０１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６２
Oil Check
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Before Driving
DIPSTICK DIPSTICK
4-cylinder models (orange handle) 6-cylinder models (orange loop) 4-cylinder models
Wait a few minutes after turning the 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
engine off before you check the oil. cloth or paper towel. check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick (orange 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole. marks.
handle).
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Oil on page 204 .
159
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０６：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６３
Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK MAX RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK MIN
LOWER MARK
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models MIN
Look at the coolant level in the Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is Checks on page 198 for information
between the MAX and MIN lines. If about checking other items on your
it is below the MIN line, see Adding vehicle.
Engine Coolant on page 209 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
160
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０６：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６４
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Always drive in the highest gear

Always maintain your vehicle possible.
according to the maintenance
minder. See Owner’s Try to maintain a constant speed.
Maintenance Checks (see page Every time you slow down and
198 ). speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
For example, an underinflated tire appropriate.
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel. Combine several short trips into
Before Driving
one.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds The air conditioning puts an extra
weight and rolling resistance. load on the engine which makes it
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
mileage and reduces the chance of ventilation when possible.
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
161
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６５
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 257 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer for assistance.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability (see next page computer controlled systems, such Do not install accessories on the
for additional information). as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
162
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６６
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires Do not attach hard objects on or
Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of near a front door. If a side airbag
or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
aftermarket components could other systems. cup holder or other hard object
seriously affect your vehicle’s attached on or near the door could
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or be propelled inside the vehicle and
any other part of your vehicle’s hurt someone.
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering the vehicle with an systems ineffective. Do not place any objects over or
aftermarket suspension kit that replace the outside edge of a front
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle, seat-back. This could prevent the
clearance can allow the consult your dealer. airbag from inflating properly.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which Additional Safety Precautions
could cause the airbags to deploy. Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
Raising your vehicle with an attached to or placed on the covers
aftermarket suspension kit can marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
affect the handling and stability. center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
Non-Honda wheels, because they interfere with the proper operation
are a universal design, can cause of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
excessive stress on suspension inflate, the objects could be
components. propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
163
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６７
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT storage areas:
DOOR POCKET CENTER POCKET Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the back seats

when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
GLOVE BOX your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
164
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６８
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for determining correct load (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.)
The maximum load for your vehicle limit:
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure 5. Determine the combined weight
includes the total weight of all 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the of luggage and cargo being loaded
occupants, cargo, and accessories, combined weight of occupants and on the vehicle. That weight may
and the tongue load if you are towing cargo should never exceed 850 not safely exceed the available
a trailer. lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity in
[The placard is on the driver’s step 4.
doorjamb.]
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
Before Driving
Overloading or improper 2. Determine the combined weight trailer, the load from your trailer
loading can affect handling and of the driver and passengers that will be transferred to your vehicle.
stability and cause a crash in will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
which you can be hurt or killed. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
Follow all load limits and other the driver and passengers from your vehicle (see page 184 ).
loading guidelines in this 850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs. CONTINUED
165
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：３８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１６９
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the If you carry large items that Carrying Items in the Passenger
vehicle, all passengers and prevent you from closing the trunk Compartment
accessories must not exceed the lid, exhaust gas can enter the Store or secure all items that could
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating passenger area. To avoid the be thrown around and hurt
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight possibility of carbon monoxide someone during a crash.
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label poisoning, follow the instructions
on the driver’s doorjamb. on page 52 . Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on If you carry any items on a roof under the seats and interfere with
a Roof Rack rack, be sure the total weight of the driver’s ability to operate the
Distribute cargo evenly on the the rack and the items does not pedals, the proper operation of the
floor of the trunk, placing the exceed 165 lbs (75 kg). seats, or the advanced front
heaviest items on the bottom and airbags.
as far forward as possible. Tie If you use an accessory roof rack,
down items that could be thrown the roof rack weight limit may be Keep the glove box closed while
about the vehicle during a crash or lower. Refer to the information that driving. If it is open, a passenger
sudden stop. came with your roof rack. could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
166
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７０
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 168 Towing a Trailer ............................ 184
starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 169
conditions, and how to operate the Manual Transmission.................... 170
manual and automatic transmissions. Recommended Shift Points ...... 171
It also includes important Engine Speed Limiter ............... 172
information on parking your vehicle, Reverse Lockout ........................ 172
the braking system, the traction Automatic Transmission............... 173
control system, and facts you need if Shift Lever Position
you are planning to tow a trailer. Indicators ................................ 173
Shifting ........................................ 173
Engine Speed Limiter ............... 175
Shift Lock Release ..................... 176
Driving
Parking ............................................ 178
Parking Tips ............................... 178
Braking System.............................. 179
Brake System Design................ 179
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 179
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 180
Activating the Anti-lock
Brakes ..................................... 180
ABS Indicator ............................. 180
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 182
VSA Activation Indicator .......... 182
VSA System Indicator ............... 182
VSA Off Switch .......................... 183
167
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４６：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７１
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 6. Check the seat adjustment (see 11. When you start the engine, check
and adjustments before you drive pages 85 to 87 ). the gauges and indicators in the
your vehicle. instrument panel (see pages 58 to
7. Check the adjustment of the 66 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and pages 90 and 91 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 73 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
9. Make sure the doors are securely
3. Check that the trunk is fully closed and locked.
closed.
10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire your passengers have fastened
looks low, use a gauge to check its their seat belts (see page 16 ).
pressure.
5. Check that any items you may be

carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
168
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：００３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７２
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition key to the 6. If the engine fails to start, press
START (III) position. Do not hold the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all the key in START (III) for more down and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce than 15 seconds at a time. If the starting to clear flooding. Return
the drain on the battery. engine does not start right away, to step 5 if the engine does not
pause for at least 10 seconds start.
3. Manual Transmission: before trying again.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way.
The engine is harder to start in cold
Automatic Transmission: The immobilizer system protects your weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
Make sure the shift lever is in vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
Driving
Park. Press on the brake pedal. coded key (or other device) is used, the meters) adds to this problem.
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 75 .
5. If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
169
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：０７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７３
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into Reverse, or shift into
one of the forward gears for a
moment. This stops the gears so
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
On all 4-cylinder models with 5-speed from Fifth to Reverse instead of shifting to a lower gear. This extra
manual transmission Sixth (see page 172 ). braking can help you maintain a safe
On all 6-cylinder models with 6-speed speed and prevent your brakes from
manual transmission When shifting up or down, make overheating while going down a
The manual transmission is sure you push the clutch pedal down steep hill. Failure to make sure the
synchronized in all forward gears for all the way, shift to the next gear, engine speed will not go into the
smooth operation. It has a lockout so and let the pedal up gradually. Avoid tachometer’s red zone in a lower
you cannot shift directly from Fifth skipping gears when shifting up or gear can cause serious engine
to Reverse. down or serious transmission damage.
damage can occur. When you are not
On vehicles with 6-speed manual shifting, do not rest your foot on the
transmission, the lockout system clutch pedal. This can cause your
prevents you from shifting directly clutch to wear out faster.
170
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７４
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points With 6-speed manual transmission

Drive in the highest gear that lets
Rapid slowing or speeding-up the engine run and accelerate Shift up Normal acceleration
can cause loss of control on smoothly. This will give you good
slippery surfaces. If you crash, fuel economy and effective 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
you can be injured. emissions control. The following 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
shift points are recommended: 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)
Use extra care when driving on 4th to 5th 47 mph (75 km/h)
slippery surfaces. With 5-speed manual transmission 5th to 6th 52 mph (83 km/h)
Shift up Normal acceleration
Driving
1st to 2nd 15 mph (25 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
3rd to 4th 40 mph (65 km/h)
4th to 5th 50 mph (80 km/h)
171
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：２３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７５
Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to
If you exceed the maximum speed 6-speed manual transmission only Reverse, apply the parking brake,
for the gear you are in, the engine The manual transmission has and turn the ignition key to
speed will enter into the tachometer’s lockout so you cannot accidentally ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel shift from Fifth to Reverse instead of
the engine cut in and out. This is Sixth while the vehicle is moving. If 3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
caused by a limiter in the engine’s you cannot shift to Reverse when the Reverse.
computer controls. The engine will vehicle is stopped:
run normally when you reduce the 4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
rpm below the red zone. The Engine start the engine.
Speed Limiter only limits engine
speed when the accelerator is used. If you need to use this procedure to
Attempting to reduce engine speed shift to Reverse, your vehicle may be
by shifting into a lower gear from a developing a problem. Have the
high speed can seriously damage the vehicle checked by your dealer.
engine.
Before downshifting, make sure the

engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,

move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the Neutral
gate, then shift to Reverse.
172
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７６
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp To shift from any position, press the
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ release button on the bottom of the
indicator, there is a problem in the shift lever to move it. You cannot
automatic transmission control shift out of Park when the ignition
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and switch is in the LOCK (0) or
have the transmission checked by ACCESSORY position (I).
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from: Do this:
Shifting P to R Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
SHIFT LEVER R to P
N to R Press the release button.
Driving
D3 to 2
2 to 1
These indicators between the tacho- 1 to 2
meter and speedometer show which 2 to D3
position the shift lever is in. D3 to D
D to N Move the lever.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a D to D3
few seconds when you turn the N to D
ignition switch to the ON (II) R to N
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
173
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：３７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７７
Park (P) − This position Reverse (R) − Press the brake Drive (D3) −This position is similar
mechanically locks the transmission. pedal and press the release button to to D, except only the first three
Use Park whenever you are turning shift from Park to Reverse. To shift gears are selected instead of all five.
off or starting the engine. To shift from Reverse to Neutral, come to a Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
out of Park, you must press on the complete stop and then shift. terrain, or to provide engine braking
brake pedal and have your foot off when going down a steep hill. D3 can
the accelerator pedal. Press the Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you also keep the transmission from
release button on the bottom of the need to restart a stalled engine, or if cycling between third and fourth
shift lever to move it. it is necessary to stop briefly with gears in stop-and-go driving.
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
If you have done all of the above and position if you need to leave your
still cannot move the lever out of vehicle and apply the parking brake.
Park, see Shift Lock Release on Press on the brake pedal when you
page 176 . are moving the shift lever from
Neutral to another gear.
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid Drive (D) − Use this position for
transmission damage, come to a your normal driving. The
complete stop before shifting into transmission automatically selects a
Park. The shift lever must be in Park suitable gear for the vehicle speed
before you can remove the key from and acceleration. You may notice the
the ignition switch. transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
174
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７８
Second (2) − This position locks First (1) − To shift from Second to Engine Speed Limiter
the transmission in second gear. It First, press the release button on the If you exceed the maximum speed
does not downshift to first gear bottom of the shift lever. This for the gear you are in, the engine
when you come to a stop. position locks the transmission in speed will enter into the tachometer’s
first gear. By upshifting and red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
Use second gear: downshifting through 1, 2, D3, and D, the engine cut in and out. This is
you can operate this transmission caused by a limiter in the engine’s
For more power when climbing. much like a manual transmission computer controls. The engine will
without a clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
To increase engine braking when rpm below the red zone.
going down steep hills.
Driving
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a

trailer.
175
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：５１３１ＳＤＡ６３００１７９
Shift Lock Release COVER 4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock
This allows you to move the shift Release slot.
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift

Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever. Use a small flat-
tipped screwdriver or finger nail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry off the edge of the cover.
176
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４７：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８０
RELEASE If you need to use the Shift Lock

BUTTON Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Driving
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
5. Push down on the key while you

press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
6. Remove the key from the Shift

Lock Release slot, then reinstall
the cover. Make sure the notch on
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
177
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：０５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８１
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly or equipped) and the windows are curb. If your vehicle has a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If your vehicle has a manual
before you put the transmission in in the trunk or take them with you. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the Lock the doors with the key or the Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the remote transmitter. fully released before driving away.
transmission. U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Driving with the parking brake
Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6 partially set can overheat or
If your vehicle has a manual Check the indicator on the damage the rear brakes.
transmission, put it in first gear. instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
178
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８２
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Braking System Design
brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the The hydraulic system that operates
wheels may be disc or drum, brakes moderately to see if they feel the brakes has two separate circuits.
depending on the model. A power normal. If not, apply them gently and Each circuit works diagonally across
assist helps reduce the effort needed frequently until they do. Be extra the vehicle (the left-front brake is
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps cautious in your driving. connected with the right-rear brake,
you retain steering control when etc.). If one circuit should develop a
braking very hard. problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting Brake Wear Indicators
your foot on the pedal keeps the In all models, the front disc brakes
Driving
brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, have audible brake wear indicators.
increases wear and reduces their In all models except the U.S. VP, U.S.
effectiveness. It also keeps your LX and Canadian DX-G, the rear disc
brake lights on all the time, brakes have audible brake wear
confusing drivers behind you. indicators.
Constant application of the brakes If the brake pads need replacing, you
when going down a long hill builds will hear a distinctive, metallic
up heat and reduces their effective- screeching sound when you apply
ness. Use the engine to assist the the brake pedal. If you do not have
brakes by taking your foot off the the brake pads replaced, they will
accelerator and downshifting to a screech all the time. It is normal for
lower gear. the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
179
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：１９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８３
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake If this indicator comes on, the anti-
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and lock function of the braking system
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is has shut down. The brakes still work
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly like a conventional system, but
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry without anti-lock. You should have
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on your dealer inspect your vehicle as
the brake pedal very hard before the soon as possible.
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if If the ABS indicator and the brake
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice. system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
You should never pump the brake pedal; released, the front-to-rear braking
this defeats the purpose of the ABS. distribution system may also be shut
Let the ABS work for you by always down.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
180
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：２５３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８４
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
steering control during braking.

ABS INDICATOR
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of

stability. Always steer moderately
Driving
when you are braking hard. Severe
Test your brakes as instructed on or sharp steering wheel movement
page 253 . If the brakes feel normal, can still cause your vehicle to veer
drive slowly and have your vehicle into oncoming traffic or off the road.
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking A vehicle with ABS may require a
which could cause the rear wheels to longer distance to stop on loose or
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
control. snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
Important Safety Reminders distance between vehicles under
ABS does not reduce the time or those conditions.
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
181
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：３４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８５
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
When VSA activates, you may notice VSA Activation Indicator

VSA ACTIVATION VSA SYSTEM that the engine does not respond to
INDICATOR INDICATOR the accelerator in the same way it When VSA activates, you will see the
does at other times. There may also VSA activation indicator blink. There
be some unusual noise from the may also be some unusual noise
modulator. from the modulator.
The VSA system cannot enhance the VSA System Indicator

vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your If the VSA system indicator comes
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is on while driving, pull to the side of
still your responsibility to drive and the road when it is safe, and turn off
corner at reasonable speeds and to the engine. Reset the system by
The Vehicle Stability Assist system leave a sufficient margin of safety. restarting the engine. If the VSA
helps to stabilize the vehicle during system indicator stays, or comes
cornering if the vehicle turns more back on while driving, have the VSA
or less than desired. It also assists system inspected by your dealer.
you in maintaining traction while
accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces. It does this by
regulating the engine’s output, and
by selectively applying the brakes.
182
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８６
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
If the indicator does not come on VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you
when the ignition switch is turned to start the engine, even if you turned it
the ON (II) position, there may be a VSA OFF SWITCH off the last time you drove the
problem with the VSA system. Have vehicle.
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible. VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
Without VSA, your vehicle will have sizes may cause the VSA to
normal braking and cornering ability, malfunction. When replacing tires,
but it will not have VSA traction and make sure they are of the same size
stability enhancement. and type as your original tires (see
page 231 ).
Driving
Deactivate the VSA system if you
This switch is under the left vent. need to drive with the compact spare
Press it to turn the VSA system on tire installed (see page 238 ).
and off.
If you install winter tires, make sure
When VSA is off, the VSA activation they are the same size as those that
indicator comes on as a reminder. were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
183
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８７
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everthing in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. Towing a load that is too heavy trailer weight. Too much tongue
can seriously affect your vehicle’s load reduces front-tire traction and
handling and performance. It can steering control. Too little tongue
also damage the engine and load can make the trailer unstable
drivetrain. and cause it to sway.
184
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４８：５３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８８
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating
start by loading 60 percent of the (GVWR): (GAWR):
load toward the front of the trailer The total weight of the vehicle, all The total weight of each axle must
and 40 percent toward the rear, then occupants, all cargo, and the not exceed:
re-adjust the load as needed. tongue load must not exceed:
U.S. VP and LX:
U.S. VP and LX: Canadian DX-G:
Canadian DX-G: 2,195 Ibs (995 kg)
4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg) on the front axle
U.S. EX-L and SE: 1,960 Ibs (890 kg)
Canadian SE and EX-L: on the rear axle
4,145 Ibs (1,880 kg) U.S. EX, EX-L and SE:
Driving
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatic Canadian SE and EX-L:
transmission: 2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)
Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6 with on the front axle
automatic transmission: 1,985 Ibs (900 kg)
4,345 Ibs (1,970 kg) on the rear axle
U.S. EX-V6 with manual transmission: U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:
Canadian EX-V6 with manual Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:
transmission: 2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg)
4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg) on the front axle
2,005 Ibs (910 kg)
on the rear axle
185
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４９：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１８９
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Hitches

The best way to confirm that vehicle Accessories Any hitch used on your vehicle must
and trailer weights are within limits Towing can require a variety of be properly bolted to the underbody.
is to have them checked at a public equipment, depending on the size of
scale. To locate the public scales in your trailer, how it will be used, how Safety Chains
your area, consult your local yellow much load you are towing, and Always use safety chains when you
pages or ask your dealer for where you tow. To ensure the best tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
assistance. quality, we recommend that you are secured to the trailer and hitch,
purchase Honda equipment and that they cross under the tongue
Using a suitable scale or a special whenever possible. and can catch the trailer if it
tongue load gauge, check the tongue becomes unhitched. Leave enough
load the first time you set up a Discuss your needs with your trailer slack to allow the trailer to turn
towing combination (a fully-loaded sales or rental agency, and follow the corners easily, but do not let the
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the guidelines in the rest of this section. chains drag on the ground.
tongue load whenever the conditions Also make sure that all equipment is
change. properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
186
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４９：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９０
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment

Honda recommends that any trailer Trailer lights and equipment must Many states and provinces require
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs comply with federal, state, and special outside mirrors when towing
(450 kg) or more be equipped with regulations. Check with your local a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
its own electric or surge-type brakes. trailer sales or rental agency for the should install special mirrors if you
requirements in your area, and use cannot clearly see behind you, or if
If you choose electric brakes, be only equipment designed for your the trailer creates a blind spot.
sure they are electrically actuated. vehicle.
Do not attempt to tap into your Ask your trailer sales or rental
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No Since lighting and wiring vary by agency if any other items are
matter how successful it may seem, trailer type and brand, you should recommended or required for your
any attempt to attach trailer brakes have a qualified technician install a towing situation.
Driving
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system suitable connector between the
will lower braking effectiveness and vehicle and the trailer. Improper
create a potential hazard. equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
See your trailer dealer for more system and affect your vehicle
information on installing electric warranty.
brakes.
187
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４９：１８３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９１
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated (see page 227 ), The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the and the trailer tires and spare are height of a trailer will affect your
following: inflated as recommended by the vehicle’s handling and performance,
trailer maker. so driving with a trailer requires
The vehicle has been properly some special driving skills and
serviced, and the tires, brakes, techniques.
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating For your safety and the safety of
condition. others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
All weights and loads are within open road, and follow the guidelines
limits (see pages 184 and 186 ). below.
The hitch, safety chains, and any Towing Speeds and Gears
other attachments are secure. Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
All items in or on the trailer are speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
properly secured and cannot shift If you have an automatic
while you drive. transmission, use the D position
when towing a trailer on level roads.
188
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４９：２７３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９２
Towing a Trailer
Making Turns and Braking When driving down hills, reduce Backing Up
Make turns more slowly and wider your speed, and shift down to second Always drive slowly and have
than normal. The trailer tracks a gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and someone guide you when backing up.
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it remember, it will take longer to slow Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
can hit or run over something the down and stop when towing a trailer. then turn the wheel to the left to get
vehicle misses. Allow more time and the trailer to move to the left. Turn
distance for braking. Do not brake or If you must stop when facing uphill, the wheel to the right to move the
turn suddenly as this could cause the use the foot brake or parking brake. trailer to the right.
trailer to jackknife or turn over. Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator, Parking
Driving on Hills as this can cause the automatic Follow all normal precautions when
When climbing hills, closely watch transmission to overheat. parking, including firmly setting the
Driving
your temperature gauge. If it nears parking brake and putting the
the red (hot) mark, turn the air Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting transmission in Park (automatic) or
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Crosswinds and air turbulence in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
necessary, pull to the side of the caused by passing trucks can disrupt place wheel chocks at each of the
road to let the engine cool. your steering and cause trailer trailer’s tires.
swaying. When being passed by a
D3 is the proper shift lever position large vehicle, keep a constant speed
to use when towing a trailer in hilly and steer straight ahead. Do not try
terrain. to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
189
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：０６：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９４
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 192 Tires ................................................ 227
important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 193 Inflation Guidelines ................... 227
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 200 Recommended Tire
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 202 Pressures ................................ 228
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 204 Tire Inspection ........................... 229
This section also includes Recommended Engine Oil........ 204 Tire Maintenance ...................... 229
instructions on how to read the Synthetic Oil ............................... 205 Tire Rotation .............................. 230
maintenance messages, a Engine Oil Additives ................. 205 Replacing Tires .......................... 231
maintenance record, and instructions Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 206 Wheels and Tires ....................... 231
for simple maintenance tasks you Windshield Washers ..................... 208 Winter Driving ........................... 232
may want to take care of yourself. Engine Coolant ............................... 209 Snow Tires .............................. 232
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 209 Tire Chains ............................. 232
If you have the skills and tools to Transmission Fluid ........................ 211 Checking the Battery .................... 234
perform more complex maintenance Automatic Vehicle Storage .............................. 235
Maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Transmission.......................... 211
to purchase the service manual. See Manual
page 281 for information on how to Transmission.......................... 214
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 215
Brake Fluid ................................. 216
Clutch Fluid ................................ 216
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 216
Timing Belt ..................................... 217
Lights .............................................. 218
Seat Belts ........................................ 224
Floor Mats ...................................... 224
Wiper Blades .................................. 225
191
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：４９：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９５
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this

section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this Failure to properly follow
mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a maintenance instructions and
problem before driving can precautions can cause you to
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed.
the instructions before you begin, Always follow the procedures
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection, and precautions in this owner’s
and skills required. maintenance recommendations, manual.
Make sure your vehicle is parked and schedules in this owner’s
on level ground, the parking brake manual.
is set, and the engine is off. Some of the most important safety
To clean parts, use a commercially precautions are given here. However,
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards we cannot warn you of every
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison conceivable hazard that can arise in
To reduce the possibility of fire or from engine exhaust. Be sure performing maintenance. Only you
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, there is adequate ventilation can decide whether or not you
and flames away from the battery whenever you operate the should perform a given task.
and all fuel-related parts. engine.
Wear eye protection and Burns from hot parts. Let the
protective clothing when engine and exhaust system cool
working near the battery or before touching any parts.
when using compressed air. Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
192
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：２９：４６３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９６
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Indicator The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items in the displayed on the engine oil life
information display to show you SELECT/RESET KNOB display according to this table:
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and Calculated Engine Displayed
indicated maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100 % − 91 % 100 %
Based on the engine operating 90 % − 81 % 90 %
conditions and accumulated engine 80 % − 71 % 80 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 70 % − 61 % 70 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60 % − 51 % 60 %
engine oil life and displays it as a 50 % − 41 % 50 %
percentage. ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY 40 % − 31 % 40 %
30 % − 21 % 30 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20 % − 16 % 20 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15 % − 11 % 15 %
(II) position, and push and release 10 % − 6 % 10 %
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly 5%−1% 5%
until the engine oil life display 0% 0%
appears (see page 64 ).
CONTINUED
193
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：２９：５３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９７
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR required at the time of the oil change
(see page 199 ).
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
the ignition switch to the ON (II) along with the same maintenance
position. The maintenance minder item code(s), every time you turn the
indicator will also come on, and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
maintenance item code(s) for other position.
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
194
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９８
Maintenance Minder
The maximum total mileage shown

is ‘‘−9999.’’
You can change the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life display is 0

percent or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remains on even if you change the
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is If you still do not perform the information display.
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator indicated maintenance, you will see a
will be blinking. The display comes negative mileage. It is displayed Immediately have the service
on every time you turn the ignition when you drive over 10 miles (for performed, and make sure to reset
switch to the ON (II) position. When U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian the display as described in the next
you see this message, have the models) after seeing the 0 percent page.
indicated maintenance performed by message. Afterward, it shows your
your dealer as soon as possible. driving distance if you continue to
drive. Immediately have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.
195
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３００１９９
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Indicator
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the odometer/
trip meter display the next time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If maintenance service is done by

ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE follows: 3. Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 10 seconds. The engine
When the vehicle needs 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON oil life indicator and the
maintenance, maintenance codes (II) position. maintenance item code(s) will
appear on the information display. blink.
2. Press the Select/Reset knob until
For an explanation of the the engine oil life indicator is
maintenance codes, see page 199 . displayed.
196
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２００
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not

Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
Your authorized Honda dealer warranty booklet for more
4. Press the Select/Reset knob for knows your vehicle best and can information.
Maintenance
more than 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service.
maintenance items code(s) will We recommend the use of Honda
disappear, and the engine oil life parts and fluids whenever you have
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
CONTINUED
197
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：３３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０１
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 218 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 159 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 160 .
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission − Check
intervals indicated by the odometer/ the fluid level monthly. See page
trip meter display. 211 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 215 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
227 .
198
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０２
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Driveshaft boots diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds
or trailer towing results in higher transmission and
＊1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months after transfer temperatures. This requires transmission and
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. transfer fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
on page 197 . the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000
miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid (For A/T only:)
every 3 years. 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). (V6 engine only)
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. 110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under −20°F,
−29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
199
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０３
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle.
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
200
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３０：５６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０４
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
201
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０５
Fluid Locations
4-cylinder Models
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Gray cap) (5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE OIL

(Orange handle) FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING COOLANT

FLUID (Red cap) RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
202
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：０８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０６
Fluid Locations
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK CLUTCH FLUID
(Orange loop) (6-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
Maintenance
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP
203
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：１６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０７
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Install the engine oil fill cap, and
fill cap on top of the valve cover. tighten it securely. Wait a few
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so minutes, and recheck the oil level.
you do not spill any. Clean up any Do not fill above the upper mark; you
spills immediately. Spilled oil could could damage the engine.
damage components in the engine
compartment.
204
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：２６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０８
Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred The oil viscosity or weight is Synthetic Oil
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
highly recommended that you use 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- it meets the same requirements
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for round protection of your vehicle to given for a conventional motor oil: it
optimum engine protection. Make improve cold weather starting and displays the API Certification Seal,
sure the API Certification Seal says fuel economy. and it is the proper weight. You must
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
Maintenance
performance and durability.
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
205
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：３５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２０９
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER
according to the maintenance
minder (see page 193 ). The oil and
filter collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service. 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood, and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter and let the
this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special
mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the wrench (available from your
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil dealer) is required.
1. Run the engine until it reaches into an appropriate container.
normal operating temperature, 4. Check the oil filter to make sure
then shut it off. its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.
206
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３１：５０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１０
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER OIL FILTER 8. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
9. Let the engine run for several

minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
10.Turn off the engine, let it sit for

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
5. Install a new oil filter according to 7. Refill the engine with the recom- add more oil.
Maintenance
the instructions that come with it. mended oil.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting Engine oil change capacity
surface of a new oil filter. (including filter): Improper disposal of engine oil can be
(4-cylinder models) harmf ul to the environment. If you
6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) change your own oil, please dispose of
then reinstall the drain bolt. (6-cylinder models) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
Tighten it to: 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) container and take it to a recycling
(4-cylinder models) center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m) or dump it on the ground.
(6-cylinder models)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
207
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：００３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１１
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield LEVEL GAUGE LEVEL GAUGE

washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
Canadian Models: The low washer

level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 63 ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather. Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
When you refill the reservoir, clean windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
the edges of the windshield wiper can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
blades with windshield washer fluid a vinegar/water solution can damage
on a clean cloth. This will help to the windshield washer pump. Use only
condition the blade edges. commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
208
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：０９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１２
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not

available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve empty, you should also check the
tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant level in the radiator.
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-Life Removing the radiator cap
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This while the engine is hot can
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent cause the coolant to spray out,
antifreeze and 50 percent water. seriously scalding you.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water. Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
209
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１３
Engine Coolant
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX
RADIATOR CAP and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Pour the coolant slowly and
counterclockwise, without carefully so you do not spill any.
pressing down. Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
3. Remove the radiator cap by engine compartment.
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise. 5. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
210
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：３５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１４
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission 5. If the level is below the lower

4-cylinder models mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid into the tube to bring it to the
upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
UPPER MARK compartment.
LOWER MARK
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into not available, you may use a
Maintenance
DIPSTICK the transmission. DEXRON III automatic
Check the fluid level with the engine transmission fluid as a temporary
at normal operating temperature. Make sure the rubber cap on the replacement. However, continued
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide use can affect the shift quality. Have
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. and that you push the dipstick in the transmission flushed and refilled
Shut off the engine. all the way. with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 4. Remove the dipstick and check
from the transmission, and wipe it the fluid level. It should be
with a clean cloth. between the upper and lower
marks.
CONTINUED
211
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１５
Transmission Fluid
To thoroughly flush the transmission, Automatic Transmission

the technician should drain and refill 6-cylinder models
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
UPPER MARK
The transmission should be drained LOWER MARK
and refilled with new fluid according DIPSTICK
to the maintenance minder (see page
193 ). Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
at normal operating temperature. the transmission.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer. 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Make sure the rubber cap fits in
Shut off the engine. the dipstick guide and the dipstick
is down all the way.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it 4. Remove the dipstick and check
with a clean cloth. the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
212
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３２：５８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１６
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower To thoroughly flush the transmission, 5-speed Manual Transmission
mark, remove the fill plug and add the technician should drain and refill
fluid into the tube to bring it to the it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic FILLER BOLT
upper mark. Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully three times. Then drain and refill the
so you do not spill any. Clean up transmission a final time.
any spill immediately; it could
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1

(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s Correct level
not available, you may use a
Maintenance
DEXRON III automatic 4-cylinder models
transmission fluid as a temporary Check the fluid level with the
replacement. However, continued transmission at normal operating
use can affect the shift quality. Have temperature and the vehicle sitting
the transmission flushed and refilled on level ground. Remove the
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is transmission filler bolt, and carefully
convenient. feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger.
213
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：０７３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１７
Transmission Fluid
The fluid level should be up to the 6-speed Manual Transmission

edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add EX-V6
FILLER BOLT
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid level with the
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the transmission at normal operating
hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and temperature and the vehicle sitting
tighten it securely. on level ground.
If Honda MTF is not available, you CHECK BOLT

may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API WASHER
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However, WASHER
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can If no fluid comes out, remove the
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual
soon as it is convenient. Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
DRAIN BOLT starts to run out of the check bolt
The transmission should be drained hole. Let the fluid run out until it
and refilled with new fluid according Remove the check bolt and look for stops, then reinstall the check bolt
to the maintenance minder (see page transmission fluid coming out of the and the filler bolt.
193 ). bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
If you are not sure how to check and the check bolt.
add fluid, contact your dealer.
214
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：２０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１８
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Pour the fluid into the filler hole Brake and Clutch Fluid Always use Honda Heavy Duty
slowly and carefully so you do not Check the fluid level in the Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
spill. Clean up any spill immediately; reservoirs monthly. There are up to available, you should use only DOT 3
it could damage components in the two reservoirs, depending on the or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
engine compartment. model. They are: container, as a temporary
replacement.
If Honda MTF is not available, you Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 Clutch fluid reservoir Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
viscosity motor oil with the API (manual transmission only) cause corrosion and decrease the life
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR of the system. Have the brake
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a Replace the brake fluid according to system flushed and refilled with
temporary replacement. However, the maintenance minder (see page Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
motor oil does not contain the proper 193 ). DOT 3 as soon as possible.
additives, and continued use can
Maintenance
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
soon as it is convenient. compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
The transmission should be drained extensive damage.
and refilled with new fluid according
to the maintenance minder (see page
193 ).
If you are not sure how to check and

add fluid, contact your dealer.
CONTINUED
215
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２１９
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Brake Fluid Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

Manual transmission models
MAX UPPER LEVEL
MAX
MIN 4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL

MAX
The fluid level should be between Check the level on the side of the
the MIN and MAX marks on the side The fluid level should be between reservoir when the engine is cold.
of the reservoir. If the level is at or the MIN and MAX marks on the side The fluid should be between the
below the MIN mark, your brake of the reservoir. If it is not, add UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
system needs attention. Have the brake fluid to bring it up to that level. If not, add power steering fluid to the
brake system inspected for leaks or Use the same fluid specified for the UPPER LEVEL.
worn brake pads. brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak

in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
216
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２０
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt

Fluid. You may use another power 6-cylinder models
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency The timing belt should be replaced
replacement, but have the power according to the maintenance
steering system flushed and refilled minder (see page 193 ).
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
A low power steering fluid level can miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
indicate a leak in the system. Check (Canada) if you regularly drive your
the fluid level frequently, and have vehicle in any of the following
the system inspected as soon as conditions:
possible.
6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
Maintenance
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully In very low temperatures
so you do not spill any. Clean up Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t (under −20°F, −29°C).
any spill immediately; it could or right lock and holding it there can Frequently tow a trailer.
damage components in the engine damage the power steering pump.
compartment.
217
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５２：５３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２１
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has two bulbs on each very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
when your vehicle was new. If you side, four in total. Make sure you are scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
regularly carry heavy items in the replacing the bulb that is burned out. to overheat and shatter.
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
may be required. Adjustments bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
should be performed by your dealer it by its plastic case and protect the
or other qualified mechanic. glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
218
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２２
Lights
High Beam Headlight
FASTENERS AIR INTAKE BULB

AIR INTAKE
COVER COVER
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models TAB
Maintenance
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb 2. Remove the electrical connector 3. Remove the bulb by turning it
on the passenger’s side, undo the from the bulb by squeezing the approximately one-quarter turn
two fasteners and remove the air connector to unlock the tab, then counterclockwise.
intake cover. slide the connector off the bulb.
4. Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
CONTINUED
219
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：１１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２３
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
TAB
6-cylinder models BULB
5. Push the electrical connector onto 1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
the bulb. bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
6. Turn on the headlights to test the left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
new bulb. change the driver’s side bulb, turn approximately one-quarter turn
the steering wheel to the right. counterclockwise.
7. Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and 2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to 5. Remove the electrical connector
secure them by pushing on the remove the two holding clips from from the bulb by squeezing the
heads until they lock. the inner fender. connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
220
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２４
Lights
6. Install the new bulb, and turn it Replacing the Front Side Marker/
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock Turn Signal and Parking Light
it in place. Bulb
7. Push the electrical connector onto HOLDING CLIPS

the bulb.
8. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
Maintenance
BULB
1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the socket from the
change the driver’s side bulb, turn headlight assembly by turning it
the steering wheel to the right. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender. CONTINUED
221
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２５
Lights
5. To remove the burned out bulb, Replacing Rear Turn Signal Light
push it in and turn it Bulbs BULB
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
HOLDING CLIPS
6. Install the new bulb and turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Insert the socket into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Test the new bulb to make sure it SOCKET

works.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
9. Put the inner fender cover in place. one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
Install and lock each holding clip 1. Open the trunk. and pull the bulb straight out of its
by pushing on the center. socket.
2. Remove the holding clips from the 4. Push a new bulb straight into the
lining by using a flat-tipped socket until it bottoms, and
screwdriver. reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
5. Test the new bulb to make sure it
works.
6. Set the lining back.
222
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：４２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２６
Lights
Replacing Back-up Light Bulbs

TRIM CLIPS BULB
SOCKET BULB SOCKET
Maintenance
1. Open the trunk. 3. Carefully bend back the corner of 5. Install a new bulb into the socket,
the trunk lid trim to expose the and reinstall the socket into the
2. 6-cylinder models bulbs. light assembly.
Remove the trim clips from the
right or left corner of the trunk lid 4. Remove the socket by turning it 6. Test the light.
trim by carefully prying them one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
using a small, flat-tip screwdriver and pull the bulb straight out of its 7. Push the trunk lid trim back into
wrapped with tape. socket. position.
8. Press the trim clips back into their

holes.
223
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２７
Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use aftermarket floor mats

make sure they fit properly and that
LOOP
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Clean dirty seat belts with a soft The driver’s and right rear floor
brush and a mixture of mild soap and mats that came with your vehicle
warm water. Do not use bleach, dye, hook over the floor mat anchors.
or cleaning solvents that can weaken This keeps the floor mats from
the belt material. Let the belts air sliding forward and possibly
dry before you use the vehicle. interfering with the pedals or
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat marking the front passenger’s
belt anchors can cause the belts to weight sensors ineffective.
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth If you remove the floor mats, make
dampened in mild soap and warm sure to re-anchor them when you put
water or isopropyl alcohol. them back in your vehicle.
224
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５３：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２８
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
Maintenance
from the wiper arm by pushing in
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
windshield. Raise the driver’s side while you push the blade assembly
first, then the passenger’s side. toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
225
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５４：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２２９
Wiper Blades
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

BLADE BLADE holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
226
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５４：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３０
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated pressure in each tire at least once a
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of month. Even tires that are in good
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
comfort. 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
The following pages give more month. Remember to check the
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, spare tire at the same time.
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to Check the air pressures when the
fail from being overheated. tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
Overinflated tires can make your hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride harshly, are more km). Add or release air, if needed, to
worn or improperly inflated can prone to damage from road match the recommended cold tire
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly. pressures on the next page.
be seriously hurt or killed.
We recommend that you visually
Follow all instructions in this check your tires every day. If you
owner’s manual regarding tire think a tire might be low, check it
inflation and maintenance. immediately with a tire gauge.
227
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５４：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３１
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
tires are hot (driven for several The following chart shows the for Normal Driving
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6 recommended cold tire pressures for P215/50R17 93V ＊4 Front:
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) most normal driving conditions. 32 psi (220 kPa ,
higher than the cold readings. This 2.2 kgf/cm )
is normal. Do not let air out to match Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure Rear:
the recommended cold air pressure. for Normal Driving 29 psi (200 kPa ,
The tire will be underinflated. P195/65R15 89H ＊1 Front: 2.0 kgf/cm )
P205/60R16 91V ＊2 32 psi (220 kPa ,
You should get your own tire 2.2 kgf/cm ) ＊4 : U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
pressure gauge whenever you check Rear: Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
your tire pressures. This will make it 30 psi (210 kPa ,
easier for you to tell if a pressure 2.1 kgf/cm ) The compact spare tire pressure is:
loss is due to a tire problem and not P205/65R15 92H ＊3 Front: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
due to a variation between gauges. 30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm ) For convenience, the recommended
While tubeless tires have some Rear: tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
ability to self-seal if they are 29 psi (200 kPa , on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
punctured, you should look closely 2.0 kgf/cm )
for punctures if a tire starts losing For additional information about
pressure. ＊1 : U.S. VP your tires, see page 268 .
＊2 : U.S. SE, EX and EX-L
Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
＊3 : U.S. LX
228
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５４：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３２
Tires
Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Every time you check inflation, you In addition to proper inflation,
should also examine the tires for correct wheel alignment helps to
damage, foreign objects, and wear. decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
You should look for: check the wheel alignment.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or Have your dealer check the tires if
side of the tire. Replace the tire if you feel a consistent vibration while
you find either of these conditions. driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires
of the tire. Replace the tire if you installed, make sure they are
can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results,
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across balance.
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little

traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
229
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：１９：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３３
Tires
U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 Tire Rotation

All Canadian models
Front Front
Improper wheel weights can damage

your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheels weights f or
balancing.
(For Non-directional (For Directional

Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and

distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed in
the odometer/outside temperature
display. Move the tires to the
positions shown in the chart each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
230
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５４：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３４
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels If you ever replace a wheel, make Wheels and Tires
Replace your tires with radial tires of sure that the wheel’s specifications Wheels
the same size, load range, speed match those of the original wheels. U.S. VP and LX:
rating, and maximum cold tire Replacement wheels are available at Canadian DX-G:
pressure rating (as shown on the your dealer. 15 x 6 1/2 JJ
tire’s sidewall).
U.S. SE, EX and EX-L:
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on Canadian SE and EX-L:
your vehicle can reduce braking Installing improper tires on your 16 x 6 1/2 JJ
ability, traction, and steering vehicle can affect handling and
accuracy. Using tires of a different stability. This can cause a crash U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:
size or construction can cause the in which you can be seriously Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:
ABS to work inconsistently. hurt or killed. 17 x 6 1/2 JJ
Maintenance
It is best to replace all four tires at Always use the size and type of
the same time. If that is not possible tires recommended in this
or necessary, replace the two front owner’s manual.
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
231
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３５
Tires
Tires Winter Driving Tire Chains

U.S. VP: Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Mount snow chains on your tires
P195/65R15 89H Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- when required by driving conditions
weather tread design suitable for or local laws. Install them only on the
U.S. LX: most winter driving conditions. front tires.
P205/65R15 92H
For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire
U.S. SE, EX and EX-L: or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L: snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed
P205/60R16 91V be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain
certain conditions. Company (SCC).
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:
Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6: Snow Tires
P215/50R17 93V If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
See page 269 for DOT tire quality tires of the same size and load range
grading information, and page as original tires. Mount snow tires on
271 for tire size information. all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
232
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３６
Tires
U.S. VP and LX When installing cables, follow the

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134 manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not
U.S. SE, EX and EX-L Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can
Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134 slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed.
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030 the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
The chains listed above are you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
available at most retail parts and selection and use of tire chains.
accessory stores that carry SCC
Products.
Maintenance
U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
Cable-type: SCC SZ 134
The SCC SZ 134 chain is available

from your dealer as a Genuine
Honda Accessory (part number
08W40-SDA-SZ134).
233
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：１４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３７
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is

needed, see your dealer or a
qualified mechanic.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a the negative (−) cable first, and
monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To reconnect it last.
indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
battery explains the test indicator’s solution of baking soda and water. It
colors. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
234
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：２０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３８
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Vehicle Storage Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle for
The battery gives off explosive an extended period (more than 1 Change the engine oil and filter.
hydrogen gas during normal month), there are several things you
operation. should do to prepare it for storage. Wash and dry the exterior
Proper preparation helps prevent completely.
A spark or flame can cause the deterioration and makes it easier to
battery to explode with enough get your vehicle back on the road. If Clean the interior. Make sure the
force to kill or seriously hurt you. possible, store your vehicle indoors. carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Maintenance
235
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：２７３１ＳＤＡ６３００２３９
Vehicle Storage
Leave the parking brake off. Put Support the front wiper blade
the transmission in Reverse arms with a folded towel or rag so
(manual transmission) or Park they do not touch the windshield.
(automatic transmission).
To minimize sticking, apply a
Block the rear wheels. silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
If the vehicle is to be stored for a vehicle body wax to the painted
longer period, it should be surfaces that mate with the door
supported on jackstands so the and trunk seals.
tires are off the ground.
Cover the vehicle with a
Leave one window open slightly (if ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
the vehicle is being stored from a porous material such as
indoors). cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
Disconnect the battery. which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the

engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fan cycles twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.
236
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：３１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４０
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 238

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 239
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 243
gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the
safely evaluate the problem and what Starter Motor Operates
to do to correct it. If the problem has Very Slowly............................. 243
stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates
you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................. 244
If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................. 245
on getting your vehicle towed. If the Engine Overheats ............... 248
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 250
Charging System Indicator........... 251
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 251
Readiness Codes ........................ 252
Brake System Indicator ................ 253
Closing the Moonroof ................... 254

Emergency Towing ....................... 255
Fuses ............................................... 257
Fuse Locations ............................... 260
237
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４１
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.
Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6 TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: Turn off the VSA system (see
pages 182 and 183 ). Driving with Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). the compact spare tire may the tread wear indicator bars. The
activate the VSA. replacement should be the same size
This tire gives a harsher ride and and design tire, mounted on the
less traction on some road sur- On models with manual same wheel. The spare tire is not
faces. Use greater caution while transmission, do not drive for a designed to be mounted on a regular
driving. long period with the compact wheel, and the spare wheel is not
spare tire mounted on a front designed for mounting a regular tire.
wheel; it will damage the limited
slip differential.
238
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：４９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４２
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TRUNK FLOOR 3. The tools are in the trunk. Open
stop in a safe place to change it. the trunk and raise the trunk floor
Drive slowly along the shoulder until by lifting up on the back edge.
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes. 4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tire out of its well.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring JACK
anyone underneath.
TOOL KIT SPARE TIRE
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park (automatic)

jack. or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,

and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
239
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５５：５６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４３
JACK JACKING POINT
6. The jack is behind a cover in the 7. Turn the jack’s end bracket 9. Place the jack under the jacking
right fender. Remove the cover by counterclockwise to loosen it, then point nearest the tire you need to
turning the handle counterclock- remove the jack. change. Turn the end bracket
wise, then pulling on the cover. clockwise until the top of the jack
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn contacts the jacking point. Make
with the wheel wrench. sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
240
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４４
EXTENSION 11.Remove the wheel nuts and flat

tire. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface of
the wheel facing up.
WHEEL WRENCH BRAKE HUB
10.Use the extension and the wheel 12.Before mounting the spare tire,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with

ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
If a wheel cover is equipped driving.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver
or other tool. The wheel cover
cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.
CONTINUED
241
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４５
WING BOLT
16.Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
17.Place the flat tire face down in the

spare tire well.
18.Remove the spacer cone from the

wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
SPACER CONE 19.Secure the flat tire by screwing

the wing bolt back into its hole.
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the 15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, the same crisscross pattern. Have 20.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
pattern with the wheel nut wrench the nearest automotive service place. Replace the cover. Store the
until the wheel is firmly against facility. tools.
the hub. Do not try to tighten Tighten the wheel nuts to:
them fully. 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
14.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
242
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４６
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter

Diagnosing why the engine won’t Motor Operates Very Slowly
Loose items can fly around the start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
interior in a crash and could on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not
seriously injure the occupants. ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine
position: trying to start. You may hear a
Store the wheel, jack, and tools clicking sound or series of clicks, or
securely before driving. You hear nothing, or almost nothing at all.
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things:
21.Store the wheel cover or center operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does If you have a manual transmission,
not get scratched or damaged. You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed
operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the
motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an
faster than normal, but the engine automatic transmission, it must be

does not start up and run. in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 245 .
CONTINUED
243
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：２８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４７
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may
headlights do not dim, check the speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working.
condition of the fuses. If the fuses than normal, when you turn the
are OK, there is probably ignition switch to the START (III) There may be an electrical
something wrong with the position, but the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
electrical circuit for the ignition fuel pump. Check all the fuses
switch or starter motor. You will Are you using the proper starting (see page 257 ).
need a qualified mechanic to procedure? Refer to Starting the
determine the problem (see Engine on page 169 . If you find nothing wrong, you will
Emergency Towing on page 255 ). need a qualified mechanic to find the
Are you using a properly coded problem. See Emergency Towing
If the headlights dim noticeably or key? An improperly coded key will on page 255 .
go out when you try to start the cause the immobilizer system
engine, either the battery is dis- indicator in the instrument panel
charged or the connections are to blink rapidly (see page 75 ).
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
234 ). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page 245 ).
244
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：３８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４８
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws.
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
BOOSTER
BATTERY
Keep all sparks, open flames, If a battery sits in extreme cold, the 4-cylinder models
and smoking materials away electrolyte inside can f reeze.
from the battery. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen The numbers in the illustration show
battery can cause it to rupture. the order to connect the jumper
cable.

You cannot start your vehicle by 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
pushing or pulling it. sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
245
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：４３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２４９
Jump Starting
3. Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.
BOOSTER
BATTERY
4. Connect the second jumper cable

to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
246
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５６：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５０
Jump Starting
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper

cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
6-cylinder models Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
247
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：１９：３２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５１
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Neutral or the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all accessories, and turn 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
on the hazard warning lights. such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the hood, turn must be repaired before you
serious damage to the engine. off the engine. Wait until you see continue driving (see Emergency
no more signs of steam or spray, Towing on page 255 ).
then open the hood.
248
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５７：０３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５２
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and watch
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
7. If there was no coolant in the the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 255 ).
reserve tank, you may need to add off.
coolant to the radiator. Let the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer 9. Start the engine and set the check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the tempera- temperature control dial to radiator reserve tank. If it has
ture gauge, or lower, before check- maximum (climate control to gone down, add coolant to the
ing the radiator. FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add MAX mark. Put the cap back on
coolant to the radiator up to the tightly.
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
Removing the radiator cap mixture available, you can add

while the engine is hot can plain water. Remember to have
cause the coolant to spray out, the cooling system drained and
seriously scalding you. refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
249
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３３：５８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５３
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
4. Start the engine and watch the oil

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR pressure indicator. If it does not go
Running the engine with low oil out within 10 seconds, turn off the
pressure can cause serious mechanical engine. There is a mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f problem that needs to be repaired
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get before you can continue driving
the vehicle stopped. (see Emergency Towing on page
255 ).
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.

This indicator should never come on Open the hood, and check the oil
when the engine is running. If it level (see page 159 ). An engine
starts flashing or stays on, the oil very low on oil can lose pressure
pressure has dropped very low or during cornering and other driving
lost pressure. Serious engine maneuvers.
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action. 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 204 ).
250
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５７：１８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５４
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator Immediately turn off all electrical Malfunction Indicator Lamp
accessories. Try not to use other
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR electrically operated controls such as MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
If the charging system indicator If the indicator comes on while

comes on brightly when the engine driving, it means one of the engine’s

is running, the battery is not being emission control systems may have a
charged. problem. Even though you may feel
no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, continued operation
may cause serious damage.
CONTINUED
251
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５７：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５５
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If you have recently refueled your Readiness Codes To check if they are set, turn the
vehicle, the cause of this indicator Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness ignition switch to the ON (II)
coming on could be a loose or codes’’ that are part of the on-board position, without starting the engine.
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap diagnostics for the emissions The malfunction indicator lamp will
or replace it. Tightening the cap will systems. In some states, part of the come on for 20 seconds. If it then
not make the indicator turn off emissions testing is to make sure goes off, the readiness codes are set.
immediately; it can take several these codes are set. If they are not If it blinks five times, the readiness
days of normal driving. set, the test cannot be completed. codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
If the indicator remains on or the If your vehicle’s battery has been emissions test until the readiness
fuel cap was not loose or missing, disconnected or gone dead, these codes are set. Refer to State
have the vehicle checked by the codes are erased. It can take several Emissions Testing for more
dealer as soon as possible. days of driving under various information (see page 275).
conditions to set the codes again.
If you keep driving with the

Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
252
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５７：３０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５６
Brake System Indicator
However, if the brake pedal does not Slow down by shifting to a lower
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
feel normal, you should take gear, and pull to the side of the road
immediate action. A problem in one when it is safe. Because of the long
part of the system’s dual circuit distance needed to stop, it is
design will still give you braking at hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
two wheels. You will feel the brake should have it towed and repaired as
pedal go down much farther before soon as possible (see Emergency
the vehicle begins to slow down, and Towing on page 255 ).
you will have to press harder on the
pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
U.S. models shown slowly and carefully.
If this indicator comes on while If the ABS indicator comes on with

driving, the brake fluid level is this indicator, have the vehicle
probably low in the reservoir. Press inspected by your dealer

lightly on the brake pedal to see if it immediately.
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
215 ). If the fluid level is low, take
the vehicle to your dealer and have
the brake system inspected for leaks
or worn brake pads.
253
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５７：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５７
Closing the Moonroof
U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 ROUND PLUG SOCKET

Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page 257 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the 4. Use a screwdriver or coin to If you need to close the moonroof
moonroof manually. remove the round plug in the manually, it means the moonroof
center of the headliner. opening/closing function is
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of developing a problem. Have your
the tool kit in the trunk. 5. Insert the moonroof wrench into vehicle checked by your dealer.
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the

round plug.
254
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：２１：５１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５８
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous. Manual Transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Release the parking brake. shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your Shift the transmission to neutral. engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle: Leave the ignition switch in the vehicle must be transported with the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the f ront wheels of f the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator steering wheel does not lock.
loads your vehicle on the back of a With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to trans- Automatic Transmission: it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
port your vehicle. Release the parking brake. than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
Start the engine. speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow Shift to D, then to N.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go Turn off the engine.

under the tires (front) and lift them Leave the ignition switch in the
off the ground. The other two tires ACCESSORY (I) position so the
remain on the ground. This is an steering wheel does not lock.
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
CONTINUED
255
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０７１７：２１：５４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２５９
Emergency Towing
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if
bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
256
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６０
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
TAB Determine from the chart on pages
260 and 261 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check if the device works.
The interior fuse box is on the The under-hood fuse box is located 1. Turn the ignition switch to the
driver’s lower left side. To remove near the back of the engine compart- LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you ment on the driver’s side. To open it, headlights and all other

and take it out of its hinges. push the tabs as shown. accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse

box.
CONTINUED
257
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：０８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６１
Fuses
BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
looking at the wire inside. fuses in the interior fuse box by
Removing these fuses requires a pulling out each one with the fuse
Phillips-head screwdriver. puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
5. Look for a burned wire inside the

fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
258
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：１２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６２
Fuses
If you replace the blown fuse with a 6. If the replacement fuse of the
FUSE PULLER spare fuse that has a lower rating, it same rating blows in a short time,
might blow out again. This does not there is probably a serious
indicate anything wrong. Replace the electrical problem with your
fuse with one of the correct rating as vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
soon as you can. that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
If you cannot drive the vehicle replacement f use with the proper rating
without fixing the problem, and you f or the circuit, install one with a lower
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating.

of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with
the fuse puller provided in the under-
hood fuse box. Make sure you can
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
259
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６３
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected

14 40 A Rear Defroster
15 40 A Back Up, ACC
16 15 A Hazard
17 30 A ABS Motor＊2
30 A VSA Motor＊3
18 20 A ABS F/S＊2
40 A VSA Motor＊3
19 40 A Driver’s Power Seat
20 40 A Passenger’s Power Seat＊4
21 40 A Heater Motor
22 100 A Battery
− Not Used
23 50 A ＋B IG1 Main
50 A Power Window Main
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 10 A Left Headlight Low 8 15 A FI ECU ＊1 : U.S. EX, EX-L LX-V6 and EX-V6
2 (30A) (Rear Defroster Coil)＊1 9 20 A Condenser fan Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
3 10 A Left Headlight Hi 10 − Not Used ＊2 : U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and EX-L
4 15 A Small Light 11 20 A Cooling Fan＊2 Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
5 10 A Right Headlight Hi 30 A Cooling Fan＊3 ＊3 : U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
6 10 A Right Headlight Low 12 7.5 A MG. Clutch Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
7 7.5 A Back Up 13 20 A Horn, Stop ＊4 : Except Canadian DX-G
260
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：２９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６４
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected

16 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Recline＊2
17 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Slide＊2
18 15 A IG ACG
19 15 A IG Fuel Pump
20 7.5 A IG Washer
21 7.5 A IG Meter
22 10 A IG SRS
23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
24 20 A Left Rear Power Window
25 20 A Right Rear Power Window
26 20 A Right Front Power Window
27 20 A Driver’s Power Window
28 (20 A) Moonroof ＊3
29 − Not Used
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 30 7.5 A IG HAC

1 (15 A) Drive by Wire 9 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 31 − Not Used
2 15 A Ignition Coil 10 7.5 A IG OPDS 32 7.5 A ACC
3 (10 A) Day Light 11 30 A IG Wiper 33 7.5 A HAC OP
4 15 A Laf Heater 12 − Not Used
5 10 A Radio 13 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat ＊1 : U.S. models
6 7.5 A Interior Light Recline＊2 ＊2 : U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6
7 10 A Back-Up Lights 14 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Slide＊2 Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
8 20 A Door Lock 15 (20 A) Heated Seat＊2 ＊3 : U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6
Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6
261
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：３５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６６
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 264 Replacement Parts..................... 273
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 266 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 274
your vehicle, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading State Emissions Testing ............... 275
identification numbers. It also (U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 269
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 269
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 269
Traction....................................... 269
Temperature .............................. 270
Tire Labeling .................................. 271
Emissions Controls........................ 272
The Clean Air Act ...................... 272
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 272
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 272
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 272
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 273
PGM-FI System ..................... 273
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 273
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 273
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 273
263
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６７
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
264
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５８：４６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６８
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped on 4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

the front of the engine block.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission. ENGINE
NUMBER
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
265
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５９：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２６９
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 189.5 in (4,813 mm) Engine oil Change＊3
Width 71.7 in (1,820 mm) Including 4.4 US qt (4.2 )
＊1
Height 57.2 in (1,453 mm) filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Wheelbase 107.9 in (2,740 mm) Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Track Front 61.1 in (1,553 mm) filter
Rear 61.2 in (1,554 mm) Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 )
＊1
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Weights Manual trans- Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
＊1
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached mission oil 2.3 US qt (2.2 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. Total 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
＊1
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Air Conditioning Automatic Change 3.1 US qt (2.9 )
＊1
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) transmission 3.2 US qt (3.0 )
Charge quantity 25−27 oz (700−750 g) fluid Total 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
16−18 oz (450−500 g)＊1 7.4 US qt (7.0 ) ＊1
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Windshield U.S. 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

washer Canada 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Capacities reservoir
Fuel tank Approx.
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) ＊1 : 6-cylinder models
Engine Change＊2 ＊2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
coolant Manual 1.35 US gal (5.1 ) engine.
Automatic 1.32 US gal (5.0 ) Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
1.77 US gal (6.7 ) ＊1 ＊3 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Total
Manual 1.90 US gal (7.2 )
Automatic 1.88 US gal (7.1 )
2.22 US gal (8.4 ) ＊1
266
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５９：２１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７０
Specifications
Lights Battery
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Capacity 12 V − 36 AH/5 HR
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4) 4-cylinder 12 V − 38 AH/5 HR
Front turn signal/ 12 V − 24/2.2 CP 6-cylinder 12 V − 52 AH/5 HR
Front parking lights
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W Fuses
Back-up lights 12 V − 21 W Interior See page 261 or the fuse label
License plate light 12 V − 3 CP attached to the inside of the fuse
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W box door on each side of the
Spotlights＊1 12 V − 8W dashboard.
Spotlights/Front ceiling lights＊2 12 V − 8W Under-hood See page 260 or the fuse box
Trunk light 12 V − 5W cover.
Door courtesy light 12 V − 2 CP
Vanity mirror lights＊3 12 V − 1.1 W
＊1 : U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6

Canadian SE and SE-V6
＊2 : U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-V6
＊3 : Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G
CONTINUED
267
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５９：３６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７１
Specifications
Engine Tires
Type Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC Size Front/Rear P195/65R15 89H ＊1
i-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC P205/65R15 92H ＊2
6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine P205/60R16 91V ＊3
Bore x Stroke 3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm) ＊3 P215/50R17 93V ＊4
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm) ＊4 Spare T135/90D15
Displacement 143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm ) ＊3 Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) ＊1, ＊3, ＊4
182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm ) ＊4 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊2
Compression ratio 9.7 : 1 ＊3 Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊1, ＊3
10 : 1 ＊4 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm ) ＊2, ＊4
Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11＊3, ＊4 Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11＊3, ＊4
NGK: IZFR6K-13 ＊3, ＊5 ＊1 : U.S. VP
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13 ＊3, ＊5 ＊2 : U.S. LX
＊3 : U.S. SE, EX and EX-L
＊3 : 4-cylinder models Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
＊4 : 6-cylinder models ＊4 : U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
＊5 : On some models Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
Alignment
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Camber Front 0°
Rear −1°
Caster Front 3°15’
268
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５９：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７２
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.
269
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３０９：５９：４８３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７３
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
270
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７４
Tire Labeling
Tire Labeling 16 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.

The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those 91 − Load index (a numerical code Maximum Tire Pressure
you should be aware of are described associated with the maximum Max Press − The maximum air
below. load the tire can carry). pressure the tire can
hold.
Tire Size V − Speed symbol (an
Whenever tires are replaced, they alphabetical code indicating Maximum Tire Load
should be replaced with tires of the the maximum speed rating). Max Load − The maximum load the
same size. Following is an example tire can carry at
of tire size with an explanation of Tire Identification Number maximum air pressure.
what each component means. The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
P205/60R16 91V that look like the following example
TIN.
P − Vehicle type (P indicates DOT B97R FW6X 2202
passenger vehicle).
DOT − This indicates that the tire
205 − Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section Transportation.
height as a percentage of its
width). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial). FW6X − Tire type code.
271
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７５
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
272
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：２２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７６
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls then controls how much fuel to inject Replacement Parts
The exhaust emissions controls under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas Ignition Timing Control System gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic This system constantly adjusts the levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work ignition timing, reducing the amount Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s of HC, CO, and NOx produced. remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust System quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and system takes some of the exhaust
evaporative emissions control gas and routes it back into the intake The emissions control systems are
systems. manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the covered by warranties separate from
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System of NOx produced when the fuel is warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential burned. tion.
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine Three Way Catalytic Converter
control, and fuel control. The The three way catalytic converter is
powertrain control module (PCM) in in the exhaust system. Through
automatic transmission vehicles or chemical reactions, it converts HC,
the engine control module (ECM) in CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
manual transmission vehicles uses to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
various sensors to determine how (N2), and water vapor.
much air is going into the engine. It
273
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：２９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７７
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converter 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine tuned-up.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
274
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：３６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７８
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the Keep the vehicle in Park
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can (automatic transmission) or
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by Neutral (manual transmission).
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. Increase the engine speed to 2,000
systems. These codes are erased rpm, and hold it there until the
when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least
and set again only after several days but not completely full (around 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
of driving under a variety of 3/4).
conditions.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
275
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：４１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２７９
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use accelerator pedal or the brake
the cruise control. When traffic pedal.
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator If the testing facility determines the
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary readiness codes are still not set, see
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot your dealer.
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
276
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８０
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 278

Warranty Coverages ..................... 279
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicle) ............................. 280
Authorized Manuals ...................... 281

277
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：００：５２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８１
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands:
be able to answer all your questions. Automobile Customer Service
If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Bella International
dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Boulevard P.O. Box 190816
satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, California 90501-2746 San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager Tel: (800) 999-1009 (787) 250-4318
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle Identification Number
management, contact your Honda 715 Milner Avenue (see page 264 )
Customer Service Office. Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Mileage on your vehicle
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Your name, address, and tele-
Toronto (416) 287-4776 phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
278
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：０１：０２３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８２
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Honda accessories are covered all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two under this warranty. Time and 2006 Honda Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s mileage limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are read your warranty booklet for coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet.
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2006 Warranty
replacement battery. Manual that came with your vehicle.
279
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：０４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８３
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Administration (NHTSA), in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems DC 20590.
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or You can also obtain other
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
280
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：０１：１５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８４
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SDA08 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4 $75.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual Base Book
Authorized Manuals
61SDA09 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6 $45.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Service Manual Supplement ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
61SDA08EL 2003-2006 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6 $50.00
０
０
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ６
61SDA30 2003-2006 Honda 2/4 door $44.00
Body Repair Manual Ｈ
Ｏ
31SDA630 2006 Honda Accord 4-door Owner’s Manual $35.00 Ｎ
31SDA730 2006 Honda Accord $29.00
Navigation System Owner’s Manual ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SDAM10 2006 Honda Accord L4 Honda Service History $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
31SDDM10 2006 Honda Accord V6 Honda Service History $12.00 Add 6% Sales Tax
31SDAQ30 2006 Honda Accord 4-door Quick Start Guide $12.00 Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE allow adequate time for delivery.
GRAND TOTAL
Indicate Year and Model Desired
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
281
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０６／０３１０：０１：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８５
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Customer Name Attention
Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
282
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：１０３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８６
Index
A B Specifications ............................. 267

Turn Signal Lights............. 221, 222
Accessories..................................... 162 Battery Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 218
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Charging System
Position) ........................................ 76 Indicator............................ 58, 251 C
Accessory Power Socket ................ 99 Jump Starting ............................. 245
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 205 Maintenance ............................... 234 Capacities Chart............................. 266
Airbag (SRS) .................................... 11 Specifications ............................. 267 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52
Airbag System Components ........... 23 Before Driving ............................... 153 Carrying Cargo .............................. 164
Air Conditioning............................. 105 Belts, Seat ......................................... 10 CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
Usage .......................................... 107 Brakes CD Changer.................................... 128
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 228 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 180 CD Player........................................ 122
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Break-in, New Linings .............. 154 CD Pocket, Center........................... 99
Indicator ................................ 59, 180 Fluid ............................................ 215 Certification Label ......................... 264
Operation .................................... 180 Parking .......................................... 99 Chains ............................................. 232
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 78 System Indicator .......................... 59 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 239
Audio System ......... 114, 122, 131, 135 Wear Indicators ......................... 179 Changing Oil
Automatic Speed Control.............. 145 Braking System.............................. 179 How to ......................................... 206
Automatic Transmission............... 173 Break-in, New Car ......................... 154 When to....................................... 193
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 266 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 72 Charging System Indicator .... 58, 251
Shifting ........................................ 173 Brights, Headlights ......................... 70 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 168
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 173 Bulb Replacement Childproof Door Locks ................... 78
Back-up Lights ........................... 223
INDEX
Shift Lever Positions ................. 173
Shift Lock Release ..................... 176 Brake Lights............................... 223
Front Parking Lights ................. 221
Headlights .................................. 218 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：１６３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８７
Index
Child Seats ........................................ 34 Daytime Running Lights................. 70 Brake System Indicator ............ 253
Lower Anchorage Points ............ 43 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 280 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 239
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 72 Charging System Indicator ...... 251
Climate Control Sensors ............... 113 Dimensions ..................................... 266 Checking the Fuses................... 257
Clock, Setting the .......................... 143 Dimming the Headlights ................ 69 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 250
Clutch Fluid .................................... 215 Dipstick Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 251
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 274 Automatic Transmission .. 211, 212 Manually Closing Moonroof .... 254
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 169 Engine Oil ................................... 159 Overheated Engine ................... 248
Compact Spare ............................... 238 Directional Signals ........................... 69 Emergency Brake ............................ 95
Console Compartment .................... 99 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 179 Emergency Flashers ....................... 71
Consumer Information.................. 278 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 207 Emergency Towing ....................... 255
Controls, Instruments and .............. 55 Doors Emissions Controls........................ 272
Coolant Locking and Unlocking ............... 77 Engine
Adding ......................................... 209 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 269 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 65
Checking ..................................... 160 Downshifting, Manual Malfunction Indicator
Proper Solution .......................... 209 Transmission .............................. 170 Lamp ....................................... 251
Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Oil Life Indicator........................ 193
Crankcase Emissions Control Driving ............................................ 167 Oil Pressure Indicator ............... 250
System......................................... 274 Economy ..................................... 161 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 204
Cruise Control Operation ............. 145 Dual Temperature Control ........... 111 Overheating................................ 248
Customer Service Office .............. 278 Specifications ............................. 266
E Speed Limiter ..................... 172, 175
D Starting........................................ 169
Economy, Fuel ............................... 161 Engine Speed Limiter ........... 172, 175
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii Emergencies on the Road............. 237 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 272
Dashboard .................................... 4, 56 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 245 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 52
II
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：２４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８８
Index
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Fuel .................................................. 154 H

Belts by ......................................... 18 Cap Message ................................ 66
Fill Door and Cap....................... 156 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 218
F Gauge ............................................ 66 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 71
Octane Requirement ................. 154 Headlights......................................... 69
Fan, Interior.................................... 104 Tank, Filling the......................... 156 Aiming ......................................... 218
Features .......................................... 101 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 257 Automatic Lighting Off ............... 70
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 156 Daytime Running Lights............. 71
Filter G Low Beams, Turning on ............. 69
Oil ................................................ 206 Reminder Chime .......................... 69
Manual Transmission Gas Mileage, Improving................ 161 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 218
Checking Fluid Level ................ 214 Gasoline .......................................... 154 Turning on .................................... 69
Manual Transmission Gauge ............................................ 66 Head Restraints ............................... 87
Shifting the ................................. 170 Octane Requirement ................. 154 Heating and Cooling ...................... 102
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 71 Tank, Filling the......................... 156 Heated Mirror .................................. 91
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 239 Gas Station Procedures................. 156 HomeLink Universal
Fluids Gauges Transceiver................................. 148
Automatic Transmission .. 211, 212 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 65 Hood, Opening and Closing the ... 157
Brake ........................................... 215 Fuel ................................................ 66 Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 215
Clutch .......................................... 215 Speedometer ................................ 64
Manual Transmission ............... 214 Tachometer .................................. 64
Power Steering........................... 216 Gearshift Lever Positions
INDEX
Windshield Washer ................... 208 Automatic Transmission........... 173
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 88 Manual Transmission ............... 170
Four-way Flashers ........................... 71 Glove Box ....................................... 100
CONTINUED
III
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：３１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２８９
Index
I Jack, Tire ........................................ 239 Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 170

Jump Starting ................................. 245 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ............ 58
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 264 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 266
Ignition K Luggage .......................................... 164
Keys............................................... 74
Switch ............................................ 76 Keys ................................................... 74 M
Timing Control System ............. 273
Immobilizer System......................... 75 L Maintenance ................................... 191
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Minder .............................. 193−199
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 58 Label, Certification ........................ 264 Owner’s Maintenance
Infant Restraint ................................ 38 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 69 Checks .................................... 198
Infant Seats ....................................... 38 Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 20 Record ......................................... 200
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 Lights Safety........................................... 192
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 227 Bulb Replacement ..................... 218 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 251
Inside Mirror .................................... 90 Indicator ........................................ 57 Manual Transmission.................... 170
Inspection, Tire .............................. 229 Parking ........................................ 221 Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 214
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42 Turn Signal ................................... 61 Meters, Gauges ................................ 64
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 76 Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 90
Using LATCH .............................. 43 Locks Modifications.................................. 163
Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 76 Moonroof .......................................... 94
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 156 Closing Manually ....................... 254
Introduction ......................................... i Glove Box ................................... 100 Operation ...................................... 94
Lockout Prevention ..................... 78
J Power Door .................................. 77
Trunk ............................................ 82
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 240 Low Coolant Level ......................... 160
IV
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：３９３１ＳＤＡ６３００２９０
Index
N P Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 88

Rear View Mirror ............................. 90
Neutral Gear Position.................... 174 Panel Brightness Control ............... 71 Rear Window Defogger .................. 72
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 154 Park Gear Position......................... 174 Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 86
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 171 Parking Brake .................................. 95 Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 171
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Parking Lights.................................. 69 Reminder Lights .............................. 58
Numbers, Identification ................ 264 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 276 Remote Transmitter ........................ 78
Parking Tips ................................... 178 Replacement Information
O PGM-FI System.............................. 273 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 206
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18 Fuses ........................................... 257
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 154 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Light Bulbs ................................. 218
Odometer .......................................... 64 Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Timing Belt ................................. 217
Odometer/Outside Temperature Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Tires ............................................ 231
Display ......................................... 64 Protecting Children ......................... 34 Wiper Blades .............................. 225
Oil Protecting Infants and Small Replacing Seat Belts After a
Change, How to ......................... 206 Children ........................................ 38 Crash ............................................. 22
Change, When to ....................... 193 Protecting Larger Children ............ 48 Reserve Tank, Coolant .................. 209
Checking Engine ....................... 159 Using Booster Seat ...................... 49 Restraint, Child ................................ 34
Pressure Indicator ............... 58, 250 Reverse Gear Position........... 172, 174
Selecting Proper Viscosity R Rotation, Tire ................................. 230
Chart ....................................... 205
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 76 Radiator Overheating .................... 248
INDEX
Outside Mirrors ............................... 90 Radio/CD Sound
Outside Temperature ...................... 64 System ................ 118, 119, 122, 123
Overheating, Engine ..................... 248 Rear Lights, Bulb
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 198 Replacement ....................... 222, 223 CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：４４３１ＳＤＡ６３００２９１
Index
S Service Manual .............................. 281 How the Passenger Airbag Off

Service Station Procedure ............ 156 Indicator Works ....................... 31
Safety Belts....................................... 10 Setting the Clock ........................... 143 How Your SRS Indicator
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 280 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 173 Works ........................................ 30
Safety Features .................................. 9 Shift Lock Release ......................... 176 How Your Front Airbags
Airbags .......................................... 11 Side Airbags ............................... 11, 28 Works ........................................ 25
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 How Your Side Airbags
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 53 How the Side Airbag Off Works ........................................ 28
Safety Messages ................................ ii Indicator Works ....................... 29 SRS Components ......................... 23
Satellite Radio................................. 135 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 30 SRS Indicator.............................. 30, 59
Seat Belts .......................................... 10 How Your Side Curtain START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 76
Additional Information ................ 20 Airbags Work ........................... 30 Starting the Engine........................ 169
Automatic Seat Belt Signaling Turns ................................ 69 With a Dead Battery ................. 245
Tensioners ................................ 21 Snow Tires ...................................... 232 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 248
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 20 Sound System ........ 114, 122, 131, 135 Steering Wheel
Maintenance ................................. 22 Spare Tire Adjustment ................................... 73
Reminder Light and Inflating ....................................... 238 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 76
Beeper ................................. 20, 58 Specifications ............................. 268 Stereo Sound
System Components.................... 20 Specifications Charts..................... 266 System ................ 114, 122, 131, 135
Use During Pregnancy................ 18 Speed Control ................................. 145 Sun Visor........................................... 96
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 20 Speed Limiter ......................... 172, 175 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 100
Seats, Adjusting the................. 85−87 Speedometer .................................... 64 Supplemental Restraint
Security System ............................. 144 SRS, Additional Information........... 23 System................................. 11, 23
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Servicing ....................................... 32
Serial Number ................................ 264 Airbag Service .............................. 32 SRS Indicator.......................... 30, 59
Service Minder..................... 193−199 System Components.................... 23
VI
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：５１３１ＳＤＡ６３００２９２
Index
Synthetic Oil ................................... 205 Replacing .................................... 231 U

Rotating....................................... 230
T Snow ............................................ 232 Unexpected, Taking Care
Specifications ............................. 268 of the ........................................... 237
Tachometer ...................................... 64 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 239 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 269
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 237 Towing Unleaded Gasoline......................... 154
Technical Descriptions A Trailer ...................................... 184 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 207
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 269 Emergency Wrecker ................. 255
Emissions Control Systems ...... 272 Transmission V
Three Way Catalytic Checking Fluid Level,
Converter ................................ 273 Automatic ....................... 211, 212 Vanity Mirror ................................... 96
Temperature Gauge ........................ 65 Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 165
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 47 Manual .................................... 214 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 266
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 273 Fluid Selection ........... 211, 213, 214 Vehicle Identification Number..... 264
Time, Setting the ........................... 143 Identification Number............... 265 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
Timing Belt ..................................... 217 Shifting the Automatic .............. 173 System..................................... 182
Tire Chains ..................................... 232 Shifting the Manual ................... 170 VSA Activation Indicator .... 60, 182
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 239 Treadwear ...................................... 269 VSA Off Switch .......................... 183
Tire Labeling .................................. 271 Trip Meter ........................................ 65 VSA System Indicator ......... 60, 182
Tires ................................................ 227 Trunk................................................. 82 Vehicle Storage .............................. 235
Air Pressure ............................... 228 Emergency Opener ..................... 83 VIN .................................................. 264
Checking Wear .......................... 229 Opening the .................................. 82 Viscosity, Oil................................... 205
Compact Spare ........................... 238 Open Monitor Light .................... 60
INDEX
Voice Control System............ 104, 116
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 269 Turn Signals ..................................... 69
Inflation ....................................... 227
Inspection ................................... 228 CONTINUED
VII
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３４：５５３１ＳＤＡ６３００２９３
Index
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 53
Warranty Coverages ..................... 279
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 208
Operation ...................................... 68
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 73
Alignment and Balance ............. 229
Compact Spare ........................... 238
Wrench ....................................... 239
Windows
Operating the Power ................... 91
Rear, Defogger ............................ 72
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 68
Washers ........................................ 68
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 225
Operation ...................................... 68
Worn Tires ..................................... 229
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 255
VIII
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
０５／０７／０１１０：３５：１３３１ＳＤＡ６３００２９７
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission U.S. VP, SE, EX and EX-L
number of 87 or higher. Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L
or 10W-40 motor oil as a Front:
Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement (see page 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) 214 ). Rear:
5-speed manual transmission: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Recommended Engine Oil: 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
API Premium grade 5W-20 6-speed manual transmission: U.S. LX
detergent oil (see page 204 ). 2.3 US qt (2.2 ) Front:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including Power Steering Fluid: Rear:
filter): Honda Power Steering Fluid 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
4-cylinder models preferred, or another brand of
4.4 US qt (4.2 ) power steering fluid as a U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6
6-cylinder models temporary replacement. Do not Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) use ATF (see page 216 ). Front:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid: Rear:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
a DEXRON III ATF as a DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary Spare Tire Pressure:
temporary replacement (see replacement (see page 215 ). 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
pages 211 and 212 ).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2006 Accord

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Accord

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Accord

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

Accord Value Package Audio System

OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

This owner’s manual covers all models of

The information and specifications included

DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

A Few Words About Safety

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

Your Vehicle at a Glance

AIRBAGS (P.11, 23)

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/ PASSENGER AIRBAG

Your Vehicle at a Glance

VSA OFF SWITCH STEERING WHEEL HORN

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Driver and Passenger Safety

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Protecting Adults and Teens

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body. Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:

Driver and Passenger Safety